summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
-rw-r--r--.gitattributes4
-rw-r--r--LICENSE.txt11
-rw-r--r--README.md2
-rw-r--r--old/51778-0.txt2992
-rw-r--r--old/51778-0.zipbin59796 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/51778-h.zipbin109227 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/51778-h/51778-h.htm4624
-rw-r--r--old/51778-h/images/cover.jpgbin37827 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--old/51778-h/images/logo.pngbin7464 -> 0 bytes
9 files changed, 17 insertions, 7616 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d7b82bc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/.gitattributes
@@ -0,0 +1,4 @@
+*.txt text eol=lf
+*.htm text eol=lf
+*.html text eol=lf
+*.md text eol=lf
diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6312041
--- /dev/null
+++ b/LICENSE.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements,
+metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be
+in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES.
+
+Procedures for determining public domain status are described in
+the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org.
+
+No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in
+jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize
+this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright
+status under the laws that apply to them.
diff --git a/README.md b/README.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e49a343
--- /dev/null
+++ b/README.md
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for
+eBook #51778 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/51778)
diff --git a/old/51778-0.txt b/old/51778-0.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 798a4e3..0000000
--- a/old/51778-0.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,2992 +0,0 @@
-The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Illustration of Books, by Joseph Pennell
-
-This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most
-other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions
-whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of
-the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at
-www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you'll have
-to check the laws of the country where you are located before using this ebook.
-
-Title: The Illustration of Books
- A Manual for the Use of Students, Notes for a Course of
- Lectures at the Slade School, University College
-
-Author: Joseph Pennell
-
-Release Date: April 17, 2016 [EBook #51778]
-
-Language: English
-
-Character set encoding: UTF-8
-
-*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE ILLUSTRATION OF BOOKS ***
-
-
-
-
-Produced by Chris Curnow, Sam W. and the Online Distributed
-Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This file was
-produced from images generously made available by The
-Internet Archive)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- THE ILLUSTRATION OF BOOKS
-
-
- [Illustration: {Publisher's logo}]
-
-
-
-
- THE ILLUSTRATION
- OF BOOKS
-
- A MANUAL
- FOR THE USE OF STUDENTS,
- NOTES FOR A COURSE OF
- LECTURES AT THE SLADE
- SCHOOL, UNIVERSITY COLLEGE
-
- BY
-
- JOSEPH PENNELL
-
- LECTURER ON ILLUSTRATION AT
- THE SLADE SCHOOL, UNIVERSITY
- COLLEGE, AUTHOR OF "PEN
- DRAWING AND PEN DRAUGHTSMEN,"
- "MODERN ILLUSTRATION," ETC
-
-
- NEW YORK: THE CENTURY CO
- LONDON: T FISHER UNWIN
-
-
- _All rights reserved._
-
-
-
-
-CONTENTS.
-
-
- LECTURE I. PAGE
- WHAT IS ILLUSTRATION? 1
-
- LECTURE II.
- THE EQUIPMENT OF THE ILLUSTRATOR 14
-
- LECTURE III.
- METHODS OF DRAWING FOR REPRODUCTION IN LINE 33
-
- LECTURE IV.
- THE REPRODUCTION OF LINE DRAWINGS 65
-
- LECTURE V.
- THE MAKING OF WASH DRAWINGS AND THEIR REPRODUCTION
- BY MECHANICAL PROCESS 80
-
- LECTURE VI.
- REPRODUCTION OF DRAWINGS BY WOOD ENGRAVING 93
-
- LECTURE VII.
- LITHOGRAPHY 112
-
- LECTURE VIII.
- ETCHING 123
-
- LECTURE IX.
- THE PRINTING OF ETCHINGS 144
-
- LECTURE X.
- PHOTOGRAVURE AND PHOTO-LITHOGRAPHY, ETC. 155
-
- LECTURE XI.
- MAKING READY FOR THE PRINTING PRESS 160
-
-
-_Some of these Lectures were printed in the "Art Journal," and they
-are republished by permission of the Editor._
-
-
-
-
-PREFACE.
-
-
-These lectures were delivered in the Slade School, University College,
-at the request and suggestion of Professor F. Brown, and, I believe,
-were the first, or among the first, serious attempts in this country
-to point out all the various methods of making and reproducing
-drawings for book and newspaper illustration.
-
-Since they were first delivered, now some three winters ago, courses
-of lectures on illustration, and classes for instruction in drawing
-and engraving have been started in almost all art schools.
-
-It seemed to me, therefore, that a small manual on the subject might
-be useful.
-
-There is no attempt in this book to define Art, or even to tell the
-student how to draw; that he learns in his ordinary school work. Still
-less is there any endeavour to dictate, or even suggest, any especial
-style, or manner of handling, or technique.
-
-But illustration is, up to a certain point, a mechanical craft, which
-must be learned, and can be learned, by any one. And ignorance of the
-requirements and absolute necessities are evident all around us.
-
-The book, therefore, might rather be described as a series of tips or
-hints--to put it on as low a plane as possible--the result of
-practical experience, which should enable the student to make his
-drawings so that they will produce a good effect on the printed page;
-but, first of all, he must be able to make the drawing well. No one
-can teach him that; but he can be taught what materials he should use,
-where he can get them, and how he should employ them. That is all I
-have tried to do.
-
-As I have said in this book repeatedly, processes are discovered and
-perfected almost daily. Since these lectures were last given, the
-method of etching zinc and copper half-tone blocks has been entirely
-revolutionised. Now, there is no inking up of plates; the photograph
-on the metal serves as a protecting and acid-resisting ground, and the
-biting is done as simply as in ordinary etching; though, of course, it
-is the lines or dots which are left in relief.
-
-Possibly before the book is out, even greater improvements and
-developments may be made.
-
-Nor have I attempted to describe all the tricks, dodges, and clever
-schemes employed in newspaper offices for making blocks from
-photographs, or for the rapid reproduction of sketches, such as
-drawing on lithographic transfer paper, making photographic
-enlargements on fugitive prints. All are most useful and valuable in
-their way, but not exactly what one would tell a student to do. If he
-becomes an illustrator he will learn these things fast enough.
-
-As the book is passing through the press Mr. W. Lewis Fraser, the art
-manager of "The Century" magazine, writes me that he thinks it "a good
-practical book, likely to be of much use to the young illustrator, and
-save the art editor many a pang and many a sorrow." I hope so, and it
-is with this hope that the book is published.
-
- JOSEPH PENNELL.
- London, _Oct., 1895_.
-
-
-
-
-THE ILLUSTRATION OF BOOKS.
-
-
-
-
-LECTURE I.
-
-_WHAT IS ILLUSTRATION?_
-
-
-The craving for pictures, that is, for illustrations, is as old as the
-world. The cave-dweller felt it when he scratched on the walls of his
-house, or carved the handle of his battle-axe; one there was "who
-stayed by the tents with the women, and traced strange devices with a
-burnt stick upon the ground." Others painted themselves blue, and
-were beautiful; and these were the first illustrators.
-
-The Egyptians were the most prolific, and their works may be found,
-monuments more durable than brass, not alone in their places, but
-scattered to all the corners of the earth.
-
-From the Egyptians and the Assyrians we may skip, offending but the
-archæologist and the pedant, to the illuminators who threw their light
-on the Dark Ages. They changed their methods from carving to tracing,
-and their mediums from stone and papyrus to parchment and vellum.
-
-But always these illustrations were single works of art, they were not
-reproduced, and only duplicated by copying by hand.
-
-Beautiful as are the manuscripts, they play but a small and
-unimportant part in the history of illustration, when compared with
-the block books that follow them; though block printing is but a
-natural evolution from the stamp on the bricks of the Egyptian, or the
-painting on the vases of the Etruscan.
-
-The block books, more often loose sheets, were printed from designs,
-picture and text, cut on the wood, in one piece, sometimes possibly
-engraved in metal. These blocks, being inked, and having sheets of
-paper placed on their inked surfaces, and the paper being rubbed, gave
-off an impression; as many blocks having to be cut as there were
-pages, and as many impressions having to be taken from each block as
-there were copies desired. The first of these illustrated blocks is
-the St. Christopher, 1423, though playing-cards, produced in the same
-way, were known much earlier.
-
-It is only, however, with the invention of printing with movable
-types, practised by the Chinese centuries before we ever thought of
-it, that illustration, in its modern sense, may be said to have been
-created; though printing with movable type is but the cutting up into
-separate letters of the pages of the block books. As soon as the
-artist was able to make his design upon a block of wood, have that
-engraved, and set up in the press with movable type, and print from
-it, a new art was discovered.
-
-From the day of Gutenberg and Schœffer, illustration has, in the main,
-never changed; new methods have been employed, new processes for
-making the blocks have been perfected, but an illustration still
-continues to be a design on a wood block or metal plate, so cut,
-engraved, or etched as to produce a printing surface from which
-impressions may be taken, either in connection with type, when we call
-it letterpress or relief printing, or separate from the type, when it
-usually becomes intaglio or plate printing.
-
-These methods have undergone, and still are undergoing, incessant
-modifications, developments, and improvements; and anyone who wishes
-to take up illustration as a profession or a study, must learn the
-rudiments of the science, as well as master the great principles of
-art, if he wishes to succeed.
-
-To-day, the methods of making the design are many, but the methods of
-reproducing it are virtually endless; still one must try to learn
-something of the most important, and the more one understands the
-requirements of drawing for engraving and printing, the better will be
-the results obtained.
-
-In the fifteenth century one had but to design the picture on the side
-of a plank, write in the text in reverse, cut everything else away,
-wet the block thoroughly, ink the face of it, lay damp paper over it,
-and rub or press the back of the sheet of paper till the ink came off
-on it, producing a print.
-
-To-day one must understand drawing in all sorts of mediums, know
-something of the effect of photographing a drawing on to the wood
-block or metal plate, take at least an intelligent interest in
-engraving on wood and metal, understand process and lithography, and
-be prepared to struggle with that terrible monster, the modern
-steam-press, and its slave, the modern printer. To do this
-intelligently requires, not only a training in Art, but in the arts
-and sciences of engraving, reproduction, printing; and it is to these
-arts and sciences that I propose to call your attention.
-
-An illustration--using the term in its artistic sense--is a design
-intended to give an artist's idea of an incident, episode, or
-topographical site, or it may be but a mere diagram referred to by a
-writer; and an illustrator is one who makes pictures or illustrations
-which illustrate or explain his own text, or that of another writer.
-
-An illustration really is a work of art, or rather it should be, which
-is explanatory; but, as a matter of fact, so too is all graphic art,
-explanatory of some story, sentiment, emotion, effect, or fact; and it
-would be very difficult indeed to point out when art is not
-illustrative.
-
-As the word is used to-day, however, an illustration is a design made
-for the purpose of publication in book or magazine or paper. The
-fashion of making such designs to accompany lettering or type is, as I
-have shown, as old as the art of writing. The art of illustration, or
-rather the existence of illustration as a separate craft, and of
-illustrators as a distinct body of craftsmen, is virtually the growth
-of this century, more properly of the last sixty years since the
-invention of illustrated journalism.
-
-Until the other day illustration had no place among the Fine Arts,
-and it has been said that, to win renown, an illustrator must achieve
-it in some other branch of art.
-
-A few great artists of the past have made illustrations which will be
-prized for ever, and to-day these men are spoken of as illustrators;
-with Dürer and Holbein it was but one of the many forms of art in
-which they excelled, but they were not altogether given up to it.
-
-To-day, however, illustration is the most living and vital of the Fine
-Arts, and among its followers are found the most able and eminent of
-contemporary artists.
-
-It cannot, however, be said that this prominence which has been so
-suddenly thrust upon illustration is altogether due to its increase in
-artistic excellence; there are a number of other reasons.
-
-Illustration has indeed reached technically, on the part of artist,
-engraver, and printer, such a point of perfection, that it has at
-length forced critics and amateurs to give it the attention it has so
-long demanded.
-
-More important reasons are the developments in reproduction and
-printing, started, and to a great extent carried on, merely to lessen
-the cost of production, but capable of giving better and truer results
-in the hands of intelligent craftsmen, than anything previously known.
-
-Still, cheapness in reproduction by process, cheapness in the cost of
-printing, has enabled numbers of absolutely ignorant people (ignorant,
-that is, of art), but possessed of, they think, fine commercial
-instincts, to start illustrated papers and publish illustrated books.
-The result has been that an army of out-of-works in other fields of
-art, of immature or even utterly untrained students, escaping from the
-hard labour and drudgery of an art school, ignorant even of the fact
-that great illustrators have always studied and worked before they
-have found a chance to start, have rushed into illustration. They are
-led blindly by the advice of the blind, they find even manuals on the
-subject written authoritatively by people who are either not artists,
-engravers, or printers, or, if they do pretend to practise any of
-these arts and crafts, are unknown and unheard of among the artists
-with whom they would rank themselves; and more wonderful still, the
-pupils of these blind leaders of the blind find publishers and
-printers ignorant enough to employ them; but not so ignorant as to pay
-more than the wage of an inferior servant for the worthless work
-supplied them.
-
-There are many of these papers, magazines, and books being published
-to-day--eminent authors even contribute to their pages; but the
-illustrations they contain are more primitive in their depth of
-ignorance than the work of the cave-dwellers, and would be equally
-valuable to future ages if it were not that they were mainly made up
-of an unintelligent cribbing, and stealing from photographs and other
-men's work.
-
-Therefore, as a mass, instead of advancing, illustration is sinking
-lower and lower, owing to the action of those who pretend to be its
-patrons; at the present moment we find ourselves in a critical
-situation, good work crowded out by mediocrity--because mediocrity is
-cheaper--real artists lost sight of amid the crowd of squirming,
-struggling, advertising hacks. Any spark of originality is stamped out
-if possible. The mere attempt to say anything in one's own fashion is
-a crime, and on all sides the prayer for the extinction of the artist
-is heard; after him will go the process man as the commercial wood
-engraver has vanished, and then--well, things will take a new start,
-good work will be done, and we may as well prepare for the time coming
-soon, when cheapness and nastiness, having struggled to the bitter
-end, will kill each other for want of something better.
-
-Still, to-day, as good work is being done as ever there was; only
-cheapness has to shriek so loud, and advertise so large, to be seen at
-all, that people are deafened by the shrieking, and at times the best
-is but seen through a glass, darkly. Nevertheless, good art will as
-surely live as bad will perish. Let us then endeavour not only to
-learn what good work is, but how to do it. In the near future this
-will be absolutely necessary. When one sees the greatest artists in
-England drawing for penny papers, one realises that illustration is
-only apparently in a bad way, that really we are entering upon a
-second renaissance, that this is but the dark moment before the dawn.
-
-As a preliminary, and also a final, word to you, I would say, you must
-draw, draw, draw first, last, and all the time, and until you can
-draw, and draw well, you cannot illustrate.
-
-The study, therefore, of the equipment of the illustrator should be
-our aim--what he must do before he can make good illustrations, then,
-how he is to make them.
-
-
-
-
-LECTURE II.
-
-_THE EQUIPMENT OF THE ILLUSTRATOR._
-
-
-Three special qualifications are absolutely indispensable to the
-artist who desires to become an illustrator.
-
-First, in order to make the least important illustration, the student
-must have a sound training in drawing, and if he has worked in colour
-so much the better, for in the near future colour work will play a
-very important part, even in the least costly form of books and
-papers.
-
-Second, the student must thoroughly understand the use of various
-mediums, oil (in monochrome at least), water colour, wash and body
-colour, pen and ink, chalk, etching, lithography, and he must have
-ability to express himself by almost all these methods. A knowledge,
-too, of the appearance the drawing will present after it has been
-engraved on wood or metal, processed, etched, or lithographed is
-necessary, because the illustrator will be held responsible for the
-results on the printed page; even though, as is usually the case, the
-fault is that of the engraver or printer, the public certainly will
-blame the artist alone. Therefore the editor or publisher will not
-employ him. The engraver will blame him if only to save his own
-business reputation. The printer will take away in every case many
-valuable qualities which the drawing possessed; but for the
-incompetency or inability of engraver and printer, the artist will be
-held accountable, and he must therefore understand engraving and
-printing well enough to place the blame where it belongs, if not on
-his own shoulders.
-
-To be able, then, to obtain good printed results, requires a knowledge
-of the reproductive arts, on the part of the illustrator, in theory at
-least, almost equal to the practical skill demanded in drawing.
-
-Third, but most important of all, the ability to discover the vital or
-characteristic motive of an author's work, and so set it forth that
-the public may see it too. And the power to do this well is without
-doubt the real test of an illustrator.
-
-Nothing is more difficult. The artist must please the author,
-therefore he should if possible know the writer personally; at least
-he must be in sympathy with, and interested in his work, else a
-difference arises at once; jealousy between author and artist, nearly
-always the fault of the author, who usually resents the presence of
-the artist at all, is the cause of half the failures in illustration.
-No artist would think of dictating to an author the fashion in which
-the latter should write his story, but every author, and not a few
-editors, try to tell their own artist how it shall be illustrated. To
-a certain extent this is right, and it would be altogether right, if
-only the author and editor knew anything of art; but not infrequently
-they do not, and the less they know the more they dictate.
-
-It may be safely said that not once in a hundred times is the author
-satisfied with his illustrations, especially if they are made to
-decorate a story. And even the designs intended to illustrate a
-descriptive article seldom please the writer, simply because the
-author has no comprehension of the limitations of graphic art.
-
-Still, with descriptive articles, the case is somewhat different. If
-the illustrator knows the author, he may undertake the journey, if to
-a foreign land, for example, with him, and a most delightful piece of
-collaboration may be the result. Or the author having visited the
-spot--sometimes he writes about it without having done so--may make
-out a list of subjects, and the artist may pick and choose from them,
-going to the place described to do so, with more or less satisfactory
-results. It is in this way that most of the better known magazines
-obtain their illustrated descriptive articles, but even by this method
-the artist and author usually disagree as to what should be drawn, the
-matter being looked at from two entirely different points of view. Or
-the artist may be asked to work up into drawings, from photographs,
-views of a place, or portraits of people never seen by him; some
-illustrators are very successful at this, work which in most men's
-hands would be but the veriest drudgery and hack work, becoming
-interesting, attractive, and truly artistic.
-
-But in most cases such drawings, even by the most skilful men, lack
-the go and life obtained when the work is done direct from nature, or
-at least without the photograph; and every true artist prefers nature
-to any photograph. There is nothing in the world more difficult to
-work from. One is confused by endless unimportant, unselected details;
-the point of view is never that which one would have selected, and the
-result, save in the rarest instances, is dubbed photographic even by
-the artless.
-
-The most awful misfortune that may occur to an illustrator is to be
-compelled to use the photographs or sketches made by an author; here
-almost certain disaster awaits the artist. The author who cannot draw
-but will sketch is terrible; the author who can photograph is
-impossible. Both, they are sure, could make the illustrations if they
-but had the time; and the artist who is compelled to illustrate them
-could write the story or do the description, he knows, if he but took
-the trouble. At least, that is the view they take of each other. The
-result is almost certain failure.
-
-Such people should contribute solely to the journals of actuality,
-where neither art nor literature find an abiding place, and the
-photograph, the amateur, and the personal paragraph are supreme.
-
-Despite all these things, and many more, people struggle to become
-illustrators.
-
-Another qualification for the illustrator is education; no ignorant
-person may become a decent illustrator. He need not possess an
-university degree; few do. But he must be able to understand a vital
-or dramatic or pictorial point, and to arrive at this understanding
-may necessitate much study of literature at home and the visiting of
-many lands.
-
-How can one illustrate a history of Napoleon, for example, without
-reading everything possible about his life that the author read, and
-without visiting the various countries in which his life was passed;
-in short, the conscientious illustrator goes through exactly the same
-process as the author, when collecting his materials. With this
-difference; the author is, in most cases, the final judge of his own
-work, and of his artist's efforts too. It is amazing that, considering
-that an illustrator has to submit to having his work judged by
-editors, rejected by authors, spoiled by engraving, injured by
-process, and ruined by printing--and all this may happen to good as
-well as bad work--armies of young people are rushing into an
-over-crowded profession, and every art school, by teaching
-illustration, is encouraging them to do so.
-
-Seeing, then, that such is the case, my object is to endeavour to give
-you a start in the right way if possible, at least in the way that, up
-to the present, the best work has been done.
-
-That is, briefly, by drawing well, by working carefully, by expressing
-ideas plainly, and these desired results can only be obtained by those
-who regard illustration quite as seriously as any other branch of the
-Fine Arts; who know the good work that has been done in the past, and
-working on the right traditions, adapt their methods to the
-requirements of the present.
-
-There are many more points to be noted, not least of which is that an
-illustrator must learn to keep his temper; from the first drawing he
-submits, until he takes to painting in despair, his work will almost
-surely be misunderstood, his motives disbelieved. If he works in the
-style affected by his paper, that is, the style which the editor
-considers appeals to his subscribers--for papers are published for
-gain, not love--he will be asked by the critic why he does so. If he
-dares to be original, to follow his own inclinations, he will be told
-to efface himself and work like the rest. If he sketches he will be
-accused of shirking his work. If he elaborates he will be told he is
-ruining the proprietor.
-
-His only consolation is that he, personally, seldom sees the editor,
-he prepares himself for the ordeal, and as the editor has to encounter
-a constant succession of irate, contrite, emphatic, and even furious
-artists, his life cannot be an altogether happy one. Still he
-flourishes, and so does the illustrator.
-
-But there are compensations. One may be asked to illustrate the works
-of a deceased author, one may treat the volume almost as one likes,
-and discuss the result with the editor. In this case the artist will
-almost certainly do his best. If he has the true illustrative spirit,
-he will study the period, the country, the manners, the costume; and,
-if let alone, to produce the work in his own way and at his leisure,
-he may create a masterpiece. This, however, depends entirely on the
-artist. It is in this way that the great illustrated works of the
-century have come into existence, without hurry, without worry, and,
-after all, the pleasure of work has been almost the only reward the
-artist has gained--and that seems to be enough to attract crowds--but
-I doubt if the business side of illustration means much to the
-student.
-
-Better still, the artist may make a series of drawings, and then get
-a writer--an artist in words--one of those people who talk of
-impressionism in prose, or impasto in poetry, to turn out so many
-yards of copy. With what a grace he does so, and with what glee the
-artist pounces on his lines! If it were not for the ever-present
-editor the author's lot would be almost as bad as the illustrator's.
-
-Best condition of all under which work may be produced is when the
-illustrator is his own author, when he writes his own story or does
-his own description; this requires that one shall be doubly gifted.
-Much may be learned by practice, but to be really great in this has as
-yet scarce been granted. But a few very talented artist-authors exist.
-
-Equally good are those magazines that publish illustrations which are
-independent works of art, of equal importance with the text.
-
-Equally pleasant, too, is working for the weekly illustrated
-press--how long this form of publication will last is doubtful--making
-drawings which will be printed of a large size and show really the
-ability of the artist. It is pleasant, too, when the editor is an
-artist or man of sympathetic intelligence.
-
-Another very important matter is the recognising of the fact that
-illustration at its best is equal in artistic rank with any other form
-of artistic expression; and that in every country save England
-illustrators rank with any other artists. Here one is forced to take
-to paint to gain admittance to the Royal Academy, though most of the
-distinguished members of that body won their reputations, and live on
-them, not by colour, but by the despised trade of illustrating.
-Critics--even the best of them--will tell you that an illustrator is
-just a little lower than a painter. It is false if the art of the one
-is as good in quality as that of the other; else Rembrandt's etchings
-are inferior to his paintings, which is absurd.
-
-But to-day many illustrators, in fact the mass, do not take themselves
-seriously. They squabble and haggle, they hurry and push, they are as
-much shopkeepers as your out-of-work painter. Others must have their
-stuff in every paper. Others' portraits and eventless bourgeois lives
-appear in every magazine, especially if the portrait is done for
-nothing and a few drawings are thrown in. Others crib the superficial
-qualities of the popular one of the moment, whether his game is
-eccentricity, mysticism, or primitiveness, three excellent dodges for
-hiding incapacity or want of training.
-
-Not that there are no good men who do find their means of expression
-among the primitives or who are really mystic, or truly grotesque,
-but for every one of these there is an army of frauds.
-
-But all the while good work is being done. You may not see the real
-artist's name in letters a foot long on every hoarding, or his
-productions in every book that comes out. But once in a while he does
-an article, or even a drawing and then the mystics, the hacks, the
-primitives, and even some few of the public, buy it and treasure it
-up.
-
-Therefore be serious, be earnest; and if you cannot be--if you think
-illustration but a stepping-stone to something better--leave it alone
-and tackle the something better. You may never succeed in that; you
-will certainly fail in illustration.
-
-There is still another point, the financial one. Here illustration
-approaches architecture. Ruskin said somewhere, probably by
-accident, for it is so true, "Never give your drawings away; tear
-them up or keep them till some one wants to buy them." At the
-present time the profession is so crowded at the bottom that some
-shopkeeping editors have profited by this to reduce their prices
-almost to nothing--literally, by threatening and sweating, obtaining
-the work of mere students and people who are without money or
-brains, though they may be possessed of artistic ability, for next
-to nothing. In the case of painters they have said, "Send us a photo
-or sketch of your picture, and we will put it in; and think of the
-advertisement."
-
-What you who want to be illustrators must think of is that the
-painters who give their work to these people are fools. Would a writer
-give his story for nothing, or a poet his sonnet? And when these
-editors say they can get such an one's drawing for so much less, tell
-them to get it, they will come after you on their knees later if you
-have anything in you, or their papers do not come to grief in the
-meantime.
-
-Of course there can be no hard-and-fast rule about remuneration, but
-the labourer is worthy of what he can get. And it has only been within
-the last few years that the clever dodge of swindling the public by
-bad photos and worse art, of sweating artists by employing hacks and
-students has been practised, for the benefit of two people, grasping
-proprietors and still more grasping editors.
-
-In connection with this matter, let me read you an extract from a
-letter recently received by me from the greatest living illustrator
-(it is therefore unnecessary to mention his name), and read at one of
-the meetings of the Society of Illustrators:--
-
-"It has for too long been the case that the unsuccessful practitioner
-of other arts has turned to illustration of the baser sort as a last
-chance of earning a living. I dare say he has a right to a living, but
-in these days of cheap and nasty illustrated journals, the low
-standard of work he brings, as a rule, to a branch of the artistic
-calling always considered by me a dignified and important branch, I do
-not believe in recognising or encouraging; and it certainly seems to
-me that a certain distinction should be made between men who take not
-the slightest artistic interest in their work and those who
-conscientiously endeavour to do it well and honestly.
-
-"I have seen the abnormal growth and prosperity of cheap and nasty
-illustration, to my great regret. I suppose that so long as there is a
-large market for it, men will be found to supply it, and evidently
-this is the sort of thing finding favour to-day.
-
-"The standard set up by the 'Cornhill' and 'Once a Week,' and by Menzel
-and Meissonier abroad, seems to be out of key with the present taste.
-It must be that ignorance of good work is responsible"--ignorance, I
-may add, on the part of the artist and editor--in their case
-intentional or deplorable; in the case of the public it is but the
-blind leading the blind.
-
-Therefore, finally, try to do good work, and when you have done it
-demand to be well paid for it. If you have not the moral or financial
-backbone for this, go and chop wood--or paint.
-
-
-
-
-LECTURE III.
-
-_METHODS OF DRAWING FOR REPRODUCTION IN LINE._
-
-
-There is no doubt that to-day the most popular method of designing the
-decoration of a book (I use the word book, but I would refer to
-magazines and papers as well) is by means of line work. By the use of
-what materials these lines are to be made; how they are to be placed
-upon paper or metal that they may reproduce and print best; and the
-way in which that reproduction and printing is done, will be the
-subject of this and subsequent lectures.
-
-The line has always been employed, not only by artists, but by the
-artless, to express form; the only difference being that the artist
-uses a vital line full of meaning, the artless a meaningless line
-without vitality. But often the work of the two approaches so closely
-that at times it can scarcely be distinguished; however, that is a
-critical, and not a technical, matter.
-
-I do not propose to give you a history of the methods employed to
-obtain lines, in fact, a history of drawing. There are many such
-books, and as for drawing you study that every day, in the life and
-antique, and I hope outside as well. But it is to line work and its
-reproduction in the present, that I wish to call your attention.
-
-The most generally adopted method of making a line drawing for
-illustration to-day is with a pen and ink, upon white paper. There are
-but four tools, and a surface to work on required. The tools are
-simple and cheap enough, the ability to use them rightly and well is
-rare enough, even though every book is decorated and all newspapers
-are to be illustrated in the near future.
-
-First, as to the pens: there is, as you know, an endless variety of
-them, all the best. Some are made specially for the artist, and of
-these the most generally used is Gillott's 659 (all colourmen keep
-them), a barrel pen, which fits a special handle; when one has
-mastered this pen, unsympathetic, hard and scratchy at first, and each
-pen, by the way, has to be broken in, one finds that the most amazing
-variety of line can be obtained with it, from the most delicate to the
-boldest. The beginner thinks because it is a small tool that only
-small work can be done with it; experience and practice will prove to
-him that it is a most sensitive implement, and he will learn to take
-care of his pens, keeping them on the holder in a box which they just
-fit, for these pens improve with age, getting better and better until
-they are almost like living things, and then they break.
-
-From this most delicate and sensitive of pens I would call your
-attention to the hardest and most unsympathetic, the glass pen, or
-stylus; this is a useful tool, but while the Gillott is to be used in
-work demanding freedom of touch and consequent variety of line, the
-glass pen is only to be used--unless you like it--when lines of
-uniform thickness are wanted. It carries a large quantity of ink, and,
-as lines can be made in any direction with it, it is more like an
-etching needle than anything else I know of; and if these pens were
-really well made in metal and not of glass, and of different sizes and
-would give lines really varying in width, they would be much used; as
-it is they are very unreliable, easily broken, and expensive. I find
-that they are liable to tear up the paper, or refuse to work in an
-annoying fashion. It has been pointed out that they are most useful
-for tracing, and also that if they clog up they may be easily cleaned
-by dipping in water and wiping off with a dry rag. I may say that they
-should be thoroughly wiped, and in fact all pens should, after they
-are cleaned, or the ink is changed, as you may not only spoil your
-pen, but your ink as well, by dipping your pen without cleaning,
-either in water or another sort of ink, as one ink may contain some
-chemical matter which absolutely ruins another. Some rubber should be
-placed in the bottom of your inkstand, for if the glass pen drops
-heavily it will be broken; but not paper, unless you wish to spend all
-your time wiping pulp off your pen. The best of these pens I have
-found are those sold by Roberson, 99, Long Acre. Between these two
-extremes, of flexibility in the Gillott, and firmness in the stylus,
-are to be found all sorts and conditions of pens. And I may say that
-you may never like, and you need never use, any special kind, but
-instead your favourite writing pen; if you like that best, it is the
-tool for you, use it. There are, however, some other sorts of pens to
-which I may call your attention. If only some fountain-pen maker had
-the sense to invent a pen for artists, he would make his fortune. But
-fountain-pens at present are unreliable in action and unsuitable for
-use with drawing inks, so they are out of the question altogether for
-us.
-
-A very good tool is the quill pen. Much variety can be obtained with
-it, especially in broad dragged work. I use technical terms because
-you understand them, I hope, and it is only the technical side of
-illustration I propose to touch. With the back of this pen you can get
-rich and broken effects, especially when it is half dry. The quill,
-the stylus, and the reed, were the tools for pen-drawing used by the
-old men. You can buy quill pens anywhere. Reed pens you had better
-make for yourselves; go to a reed bed in the early summer, cut off the
-top of the stalk, strip off the outer covering, and cut the inner
-canes into sections between the joints, cut your pen and finish it at
-once, or rather a lot of them, for when the reed is dry it is liable
-to split and is not half so flexible.
-
-Pen work with reed pens really should only be done when they are
-fresh; but at all times they glide easily over the paper, though any
-pen will do this after you have mastered it. Reed pens also make a
-broad fat line and hold lots of colour.
-
-Another pen which is useful sometimes is Perry's Auto-Stylo, or
-marking pen, from Perry's, Holborn Viaduct; lines half an inch broad
-or as fine as a hair can be made with it, and I have at times used it
-as a brush; it is a most amusing instrument.
-
-Brandauer's round pointed pens are used by some. But the pen you
-should use is the pen you can use; that is, the pen with which you can
-get the most variety of line. Or you may use half a dozen, from the
-finest Gillott to the biggest reed. It is not the pen, but the person
-who uses it. Sometimes it is not a bad thing to remember this.
-
-Many artists are now taking up the use of the brush; most probably it
-was used by the old men, certainly the men of the last generation
-employed it, as it was much easier to work on the wood block with a
-brush than a pen. And we know that the Japanese pen is a brush. The
-advantages are flexibility of line, amount of colour it will hold,
-freedom from scratchiness, and absolute freedom of movement in every
-direction--the greatest advantage of all--the line itself is fuller
-and fatter, more pleasing. The drawbacks, well, there scarcely are
-any, save that to use either brush or pen well is about as difficult
-as to play the violin; that is all.
-
-The commonest brush for line work is that used by lithographers, a
-sable rigger which they cut to a fine point, removing the outside
-hairs; but almost any good pointed brush will do. Very good indeed are
-the genuine Japanese brushes, the small thin ones are the best--in
-black handles--you can pick these up sometimes at the Japanese
-dealers, but I imagine any artist's colourman would send to Japan for
-them if there was a sufficient demand; I have got them in quantities
-for a penny each.
-
-There are various mechanical tint tools like air brushes in use; they
-are of little importance to the artist, and if you want a dotted tint
-you can get it by dipping a toothbrush in ink and rubbing the inked
-hairs with a match stick, when the ink will be splattered in dots and
-blots all over the paper. You may lay a piece of paper on the parts
-you wish to keep white, and paint or scratch out spots that are too
-dark, or you may impress your inked thumb or pieces of inked silk on
-the paper, or indulge in any trick of this sort that amuses you and
-gives the desired result.
-
-Ink is probably the most important material employed in pen-drawing.
-It must be good, that is, it must be black--it should not shine--it
-must never settle, it must flow easily, dry quickly, and never clog
-the pen. There are many varieties of good ink, but the only ink I
-know of to-day, which gives me exactly what I want and is obtainable
-of the same quality all over the world, all over Europe at any
-rate--and this is an enormous advantage--is Bourgeois' Encre de Chine
-Liquide. During several years it has never varied, and that is more
-than I can say of any other. It is indelible, a desirable quality in
-ordinary use. The only bad thing about it is the vile, ill-balanced
-bottle and the rotten cork, which always breaks and often gets you
-into a mess. The best bottle I have ever seen is that in which
-Higgins' American drawing ink comes.
-
-This is not a talk on inks, but a hint as to what I have found the
-most satisfactory and reliable--if you do not like this one, every
-colourman makes an ink or sells some one else's; try it. Among the
-best are Higgins', Winsor and Newton's, Newman's, Rowney's, Reeves',
-Stevens' ebony stain.
-
-Freshly-ground Indian ink is the best of all, but to grind up your ink
-is too much trouble, too tedious and too unreliable to be worth the
-bother it entails. Indian ink, under certain conditions, shines and
-glitters, and this is not pleasant, and hinders photography. Lamp
-black and ivory black are quite dead and free from shine, but they are
-not fixed colours. They may be easily fixed with gall or gum.
-
-Writing inks usually, if not always, have blue in them; therefore they
-will not photograph, they run about, blot, and generally misbehave.
-Sometimes one gets good black writing-ink; when you do get it, use it.
-But Indian or Chinese ink is best, and as I know of no better
-preparation at present, I commend Bourgeois' Encre de Chine Liquide;
-it comes in the tall bottle with the diagonal black and yellow dragon
-on the label. Coloured inks, save blue, may be used, but unless the
-illustration is to be printed in that colour the result is almost
-always disappointing; delicate washes of brown, for instance, becoming
-staring solid blacks.
-
-In sketching out of doors with ink, a method I most strongly
-recommend, pour your ink, or rather enough of it, into an exciseman's
-ink-bottle, one of those unspillable affairs which you can cork
-up--though, save to keep the dust out of them, there is no occasion to
-do so--and attach it by a sort of watch-guard to your buttonhole,
-putting the bottle in your pocket. Messrs. Newman, 24, Soho Square,
-have fixed up some of these bottles for me, and they will, I have no
-doubt, supply them.
-
-The general way with artists is to put their uncorked ink-bottle in
-their waistcoat pocket; if they should happen to lean over, on
-straightening up the ink is found upon their trousers or frocks, or
-sketch-block--in the male a result most conducive to strong language,
-especially if the trousers are spoiled; the drawing doesn't so much
-matter.
-
-Also provide yourself with a hardish lead pencil H., or, better, a
-blue one, as the blue doesn't photograph, but it's hard to get off the
-paper, and don't look well; also some lithographic crayon or Wolff's
-carbon pencils; a good rubber, pure rubber or bread for the pencil, an
-ink rubber or eraser for the ink; some Chinese white and gum for
-patching up things; and for use in the house, an old razor to scratch
-out, and out of doors a folding eraser, such as Mr. Percy Young, of
-Gower Street, supplies: get the folding ones, as the others are not
-only less convenient but rather dangerous to carry.
-
-Lastly, the paper: the photo-engraver will tell you Bristol board.
-Certainly, a simple open line drawing in pure black upon pure white
-smooth paper, very little reduced, should give a truer result than
-anything else. But what it does really is to give engraver and printer
-less trouble, and that is what most of them want; in the majority of
-cases it is best to aid them, otherwise your work is spoiled.
-Therefore, if you like Bristol board, use it, and use it whether you
-like it or no, if you are doing work for ordinary printing. But if
-your illustration is to be well engraved and well printed, use what
-paper you like. But to get satisfactory results from rough paper
-requires much experience, and you had better arrive at that experience
-by doing simple things, in a fashion which will engrave well; go to
-printing offices and engravers' shops, find out what is necessary,
-try to work in harmony with the engraver and printer, and they will do
-their best for you: most of them care about their work, and are
-genuinely sorry if they cannot make yours look well, so work with
-them, and they will work with you.
-
-As to the Bristol board, get the best; if the drawing is large and has
-to be rolled up, the thin, if not the thicker quality; it is known as
-so many sheets, two, four, six sheets the heaviest. You must get the
-best quality, otherwise there is a risk of bad spongy places in it,
-which may almost ruin the drawing, at any rate its appearance, and
-necessitate patching up which is delaying and annoying. Bristol
-boards, too, may always be made up into books or blocks. Some boards
-are now mounted so that they can be stripped off the mount when the
-drawing is finished, among them are Turnbull's Art Tablets; while the
-best surface of all, which is like marble or ivory to work on, a
-surface which may be rubbed or scratched without harm, is the old
-mounted thin Whatman or Bank Note paper prepared by Messrs. Roberson
-and Newman. These thin papers are mounted on heavy boards and kept
-under hydraulic pressure for weeks, until the whole becomes a solid
-mass. This mounted Whatman, when well made, is the best paper in the
-world; it is also the most expensive. Thin foreign correspondence
-paper may also be used, putting it over the sketch like tracing paper,
-and when the drawing is finished mounting it on card board; tracing
-paper may also be mounted. One scheme not much in vogue yet is to draw
-upon black paper with Chinese white, making the drawing in white lines
-instead of black. Any sort of writing paper, or all varieties of rough
-or smooth Whatman are useful. Of course in drawing on rough paper you
-are bound to get a rough broken result in printing; however, if you
-know what you are after, no one will object but the engraver. In fact
-any sort of white paper may be used for pen and ink work; only, the
-smooth gives the most certain results. There are also many grained
-papers which give a tint; that is, a mechanical tint is printed on the
-paper, lights are scratched in it, blacks are put in with a pen or
-brush, another tint in pencil or chalk is added, and many tricks may
-be played, one usually only a little less satisfactory than the other.
-These papers are made by Gillott, of Paris, and Anger and Goeschl, of
-Vienna, and generally supplied by colourmen; they are called Gillott
-or scratch papers.
-
-There are also various clay or chalk surfaced papers which, after
-being drawn upon, may be scratched to get light in the design. The
-results are, however, rarely satisfactory. In fact, it is best to use
-a good handmade white paper; you will be surer of your result, and
-that is what you are working for.
-
-Having given you a list of the necessary materials, I will try to tell
-you how you should use them. I shall not try to compel you to make
-short lines or long lines, black blots or white lines: work in your
-own fashion, only that must be good, and capable of being engraved and
-printed. I shall not tell you how to draw, but how to draw so that
-your work may reproduce and print best. You may commence your drawing
-in either one of two ways, by making a pencil sketch on your sheet of
-paper which is to be sent to the engraver, preferably in blue pencil
-which does not photograph, and in as few lines as possible; or by
-commencing straight away at your final work, in ink; if it is a
-drawing from nature, I do not see why you should not do this, for it
-will teach you care in selecting your lines and putting them down. And
-as you have an ink eraser in metal and rubber you should be able to
-remove those which are wrong.
-
-But if your design is more in the nature of a composition with
-elaborate figures, or figures in action, it will be almost impossible
-to do this. True, most interesting sketches may be made, and should be
-made and must be made direct from nature. But your final design will
-in nearly every case have to be built up from these. Therefore, unless
-you can "see the whole thing in your head" before you put it on paper,
-so clearly that you only want a model to keep you right, I think you
-had better make sketch after sketch, and then transfer the best to
-the sheet on which it is to be completed by putting transfer paper
-under the sketch and tracing paper over it. Probably you will pencil
-on the final drawing, but do as little as you can, for the camera,
-when the drawing comes to be photographed, pays just as much attention
-to smudges, finger marks, pencil lines, and meaningless accidents as
-it does to those portions which are brim full of meaning. By
-neglecting these matters all artists give engravers much trouble, and
-unless the engraver is an artist too he not infrequently bestows great
-pains on the reproduction of an accidental line, even though in order
-to do so he ruins the entire drawing. And again, in all cheap work
-your drawing is placed with a number of others and no special
-attention is paid to it, and it reproduces somehow, or don't, which is
-much the same thing. But in case of failure you will be blamed by the
-public.
-
-The first thing to remember in putting your drawing on the paper is
-the space it is to fill; if it is to be a full page, it must be made
-the size of that page or twice as large; at any rate it must have some
-definite relation to it. In the case of half a page, it is only
-necessary that the top or bottom of the drawing should fit across the
-printed matter; still, the drawing should not be made so high that it
-will not fit in, or so narrow as to be ineffective, but if you will
-look at any book or magazine you will see what I mean.
-
-Again, for cheap rapid work as little cross-hatching as possible
-should be indulged in, for all cross-hatched lozenges become smaller
-lozenges in reduction, and the smaller they are the easier it is for
-them to fill up and clog with ink. Draw your shadows with parallel
-lines whenever you can without being mechanical; they engrave and
-print well.
-
-After several years' experience I am quite unable to say how much or
-how little a drawing should be reduced, for there is no reason why it
-should be drawn the same size it is to be engraved, save that the
-nearer it is the same size, the nearer the result should be to the
-original; if the reduction is to be great, it is easier to make the
-design larger and have it mechanically reduced. The excessive
-reduction of a drawing tends to make the lines run together into a
-black mass sometimes, and the enlargement of a drawing--this, too, may
-be done--makes the lines at times look crude and clumsy. But it is
-impossible to foretell results in any two cases. Only there is one
-matter: a good drawing in line will, with good engraving and
-printing, look well, whether the artist knew anything of process or
-not. But there are some things to be observed, if certain results are
-wished for.
-
-In simple cheap work the ink should be uniformly black, for the
-engraved block will be put with type, and inked with the same amount
-and strength of colour all over; therefore, in order to get variety,
-distance, effect, you must use lines of different widths, placed at
-varying distances apart, not of different degrees of colour. In theory
-at least, then, the foreground should be drawn with a firm bold line,
-the middle distance with a medium-sized line, the lines themselves
-closer together, and the extreme distance with a thin line. But there
-is no rule, only get variety in your line and this will produce
-variety and interest in the engraved result.
-
-If you make your drawings much larger than they are to be reproduced,
-you will often be greatly surprised at the change in their appearance.
-Greys will, by filling up, become darker, and lights lighter owing to
-the concentration around them of masses of colour; that is, blacks
-become blacker, and whites whiter in reproduction. But do remember
-that though the drawings by Boyd Houghton, Millais, F. Walker and
-Pinwell were made the size you see them, on the wood, in the books of
-twenty-five years ago, the drawings made to-day by Abbey, for example,
-are four or five times as large as the published engravings, and are
-not, in the originals, filled with that microscopic work which appears
-in the reproductions. But do not make crude lines under the impression
-that they will ever be anything but crude. Try to make a beautiful
-drawing, a beautiful line--unless you can do this you will never get a
-beautiful reproduction; and once you have learned to draw, study the
-best books and the best magazines, always remembering that drawings
-to-day are made much larger, as a rule, than you see them on the
-printed page.
-
-Again, in reproduction you will often find that some parts of the same
-drawing change more than others; some places, for example, become too
-weak, others too strong. I cannot explain this, but you will find that
-it does happen. At times it may be because the photograph is bad, or
-the etching is rotten, but even with good photography and etching the
-final result is often disappointing.
-
-In pen work you may run the gamut from solid blacks to the most
-delicate grey line. Do not try to always, but select a colour scheme
-which is restrained and appropriate to every drawing.
-
-Solid black will reproduce best because it is a solid mass, excepting
-in cheap rapid printing, when solid blacks either get too much or too
-little ink. A number of black lines close together will reproduce
-almost equally well, because in engraving and printing these lines
-support the paper and do not take up too much ink. A single thin line,
-on the contrary, always thickens in the engraving, and often prints
-badly because in the printing press the ink and paper bear down too
-heavily upon it and it receives too much ink and thickens up.
-
-I have recommended you to use only black ink and white paper; before
-you have worked much you will try experiments, I am sure, in greying
-ink, putting water with it, and leaving pencil marks, or adding lines
-with lithographic chalk, or crayon; but you will find out the moment
-the drawing is printed that everything comes quite black, and if you
-have made your distance in broad grey lines it will possibly ruin your
-whole scheme. Greys may be obtained by engraving the blocks by hand,
-rouletting, or a number of other ways which I shall explain. Line
-drawings may also be made altogether in pencil, on rough paper, in
-chalk or crayon, reinforced, if necessary, with a blot of ink, or a
-wash, or a line with a pen here and there; but for line work with
-these materials you must employ a grained paper in order to get a
-proper mechanical direct reproduction of the work. Bristol boards must
-not be used. Sometimes these combinations of pen and pencil work are
-excellent; but they must harmonise, otherwise the result is
-unpleasant.
-
-Some idea of the effect your drawing will present when engraved may be
-obtained by the use of a diminishing glass; and, _vice versâ_, you
-might study some of the engravings in the books and magazines around
-you with a magnifying glass.
-
-Corrections in line drawings with pen should be made either with an
-ink eraser, a razor, the razor knife, or by painting over the place
-with Chinese white, or, if it be large, by pasting down a bit of paper
-on it. This is the most usual way; if the paper is thin and the edges
-well joined, it is the best. Or you may cut a hole from the back and
-let in a bit of paper, paring down the edges, or scraping them down;
-but be careful about the edges, because they make a nasty line when
-the drawing is photographed. In pencil, crayon, or charcoal work,
-remove imperfections in the ordinary way with a bit of rubber. You
-will not, of course, lose your head and elaborate a pen drawing, any
-more than you would a chalk or charcoal drawing or etching. You will
-select your lines with the utmost care, put them down with the
-greatest intelligence, and the more care and intelligence you exercise
-the better will be your illustrations; however, this is what you are
-trying to do every time you make a drawing in line from life or the
-antique, and I will not bore you by repeating what you hear every day
-in your ordinary school work, nor will I do more than remind you how
-careful you must be in your composition, in your arrangement of lines,
-in your placing of blacks, in making up your picture; only exercise
-the judgment necessary to compose any other work of art.
-
-Your drawings should be works of art; be proud of them; but also
-regard them as a means to an end, and, as I have said, for cheap and
-rapid printing draw on smooth white paper with good black ink, and do
-not use big solid blacks, or single thin lines. Keep your work as open
-as possible and do not have it reduced. That is, draw as near the size
-it is to appear (if you can find that out) as possible. For the best
-engraving and printing, draw as you like. Anything to-day can be
-photographed and engraved; the great difficulty is in the printing.
-Remember that if you do not put distinction and character into your
-work, the engraver and printer cannot. They will take much away in any
-case.
-
-As you are working for an editor, you will have to please him. Do so
-if you can without hurting your work and your own standard of right
-and wrong.
-
-But always work in your own way, if that is at all possible for
-reproduction and printing, if not, you will have to change your
-methods. For you are working for a definite purpose, illustration;
-therefore your work must engrave.
-
-If you wish to succeed you must see all the illustration you can, you
-must talk to editors and illustrators, and you must go down into the
-printing office and the engraver's shop.
-
-You must learn your trade, for if you have not passed through the
-drudgery of the apprentice, you will never become a master of your
-craft.
-
-
-
-
-LECTURE IV.
-
-_THE REPRODUCTION OF LINE DRAWINGS._
-
-
-As illustrators, or would-be illustrators, your work is not at an end
-with the completion of your drawings; you must look after them while
-they are being engraved, and you should see them through the press.
-From the time you are given a commission to illustrate a subject until
-the printed result is in the hands of the public, the work in all its
-stages should be the object of your untiring attention. It is true
-that at present the fact that you take an interest in your profession
-will be counted against you in some quarters, for should you
-happen--as is not unlikely--to know more of drawing, engraving, and
-printing than the art editor, the engraver, or the printer, your
-suggestions will not be received with enthusiasm, nor your criticisms
-with delight. Suggestions mean changes, and criticism means objections
-to the routine way of doing things. Then you may not feel a great
-interest in the scientific side of your work, yet chemistry plays an
-important part in illustration. The mechanical reproduction of
-drawings is based entirely on chemical action, and you must know
-something of this matter if you would get good results.
-
-But let us consider the whole subject. Drawings in line were
-originally, in the fifteenth century, reproduced by wood cutting;[1]
-that is to say, the drawing was made in line with pen, point, or
-brush on the side of a plank, and all those portions of the block
-which were not drawn upon were cut away with knives and chisels, the
-design only remaining in relief; this relief was dabbed over with ink
-or paint, and a piece of damp paper was laid on it. The back of this
-paper was rubbed, burnished, or pressed on to the inked surface of the
-block and took up the ink from it; on removing the paper an impression
-in reverse of the inked block was found on the under side of it. And
-this was the method, with improvements, employed in printing from
-type, for three hundred years.
-
- [1] Of course I shall refer to metal engraving in another
- lecture.
-
-About the beginning of this century the design began to be drawn upon
-the end of a block of box-wood--a cross section of it--and the parts
-left blank were cut away with gravers, tools used by engravers in
-metal, or else lines were engraved on the surface of the block, which
-printed as whites in the blacks; the grain of the cross section of
-box-wood was firmer and finer, and with the gravers more delicate
-lines could be engraved and more true results obtained; and at the
-same time continual improvements were being made in the presses, steam
-being substituted for hand power, and the manufacture of paper and ink
-totally revolutionised.
-
-These methods were employed until about 1865, when, instead of the
-drawings being made by the artists on the block of wood, they began to
-be drawn on paper in line, and then photographed on to the wood. This
-was a great improvement, because the artist could now make his designs
-of any size he wished and have them photographed down to the required
-dimensions and reversed for him: the mere reversing in many cases was
-both tedious and uninteresting.[2]
-
- [2] If the drawing is a portrait of a place, it must be reversed
- on the wood or metal in order that the print may appear as the
- original does in nature.
-
-The final step which brings us to the present, though not by any
-means, I am sure, to the end of the chapter, is the superseding of the
-woodcutter or wood engraver in line, by the mechanical engraver in
-metal or gelatine.
-
-Now you may do your drawings, if you wish, in line with a pencil or
-brush upon the prepared piece of box-wood, and the engraver may cut
-away all those portions of the wood-block which you have not touched,
-remembering always that though you draw freely he must engrave
-laboriously, and the more free your drawing becomes, the more
-complicated must his engraving be. So when you make a sketchy drawing
-on wood, none but the most accomplished engraver can retain that look
-of freedom and sketchiness; if the lines of the drawing become really
-complicated, in cross hatching, for example, he cannot follow them, he
-must suggest them. Hence, unless the engraver really loves this sort
-of work, it is but drudgery, and the better the reproduction the more
-skilled labour wasted.
-
-Now photography has changed all this. A photograph of the drawing, of
-the required size it is to appear on the printed page, is taken. The
-drawing may be enlarged or reduced to this size, and the negative thus
-obtained is placed in reverse in a photographic printing frame, in
-contact with a sensitised zinc plate, coated with a thin film either
-of albumen or bitumen, or it may be that a gelatine film is the
-material used for printing on. In the first method the albumen coated
-piece of zinc is removed from the printing frame as soon as the
-photographic print has been made; it is then coated with ink and
-placed in water, the albumen and ink upon it adhere to those parts of
-the zinc which have been exposed to light, and may be washed off the
-other parts, thus leaving the picture on the zinc in ink. By the
-bitumen process the picture is printed in the same way: the plate is
-placed in a bath of turpentine, the picture appears on the zinc, and
-the bitumen dissolves off the other parts.
-
-If these two prints are now covered with powdered rosin, gum, and ink,
-they may be placed in a bath of nitric acid and water, and the exposed
-parts bitten or etched away. This is a most interesting and delicate
-process, and success depends in good work more upon the skill and
-artistic intelligence of the etcher than the chemicals used. The
-object is to remove all the whites as in wood engraving, half remove
-the greys, and leave the blacks. After the zinc has been bitten a
-short time it is taken out of the bath again, covered with gum, resin
-and ink to protect it from the acid, heated, when the protecting mass
-melts and runs down the sides of the bitten lines and protects them
-also; this process is continued until the block is sufficiently
-etched. When the exposed parts are all eaten away the picture appears
-in relief. This occupies a few hours, maybe but an hour or less. When
-completed, the zinc picture is mounted upon a piece of wood, to make
-it the same height as the type, placed in a printing press and copies
-are made of it, or from electrotypes or stereotypes, at the rate of
-from twenty to 20,000 an hour. This is, I hope, an intelligible
-outline of the photo-engraving process; every mechanical engraver has
-some variation which is his carefully guarded secret. The blocks may
-be of zinc or copper or other metal, and all sorts of chemicals are
-used. But I cannot too strongly impress upon you that good work in
-mechanical engraving is only to be obtained by artistic workmen;
-still, remarkable results are to be seen all about, even in the
-cheapest prints. But the very best process engravings are produced
-only by men who are artists and care for each block. In the case of
-the best engravers they will know better than you which process to
-use, and there is no more necessity for you to try to tell a
-mechanical engraver how the work is to be done, than for you to tell a
-wood engraver what tools he shall work with. Bad drawings may look
-better by one process than another, and good illustrations may be
-spoiled more by one method than another. But every intelligent
-engraver will try again and again until he gets the best result he
-can.
-
-The gelatine process consists in printing the picture on a sensitised
-film of gelatine. Now if this gelatine is soaked in water the parts
-representing the whites swell, and the darks, really the picture,
-remain as they were, as the light has rendered them insensible to
-water; from this swelled gelatine mould a cast in plaster of Paris can
-be taken, from this a wax mould is made, and finally an electrotype.
-The process is only used, I believe, by one firm; the results are
-good, but no better than the others.
-
-Let us consider for a moment what are the advantages and disadvantages
-of mechanical reproduction. The first advantage is rapidity of
-production--a facsimile wood engraving may take weeks to produce, a
-mechanical engraving takes a day or so; this is not an artistic but a
-commercial gain. The wood engraving loses, the more intricate and
-complicated and close the details become; the mechanical or process
-engraving not infrequently gains.
-
-The wood engraver may make mistakes in cutting the lines in the wood
-block, but if the lines are properly put down, the camera and the
-process engraver should not; and if they do, much less time is lost
-and labour wasted than with wood engravings.
-
-Mechanical engraving is a much less costly method. These are not any
-of them very artistic reasons, but they count with publishers, and
-they count with you. But the great artistic advantage is that the
-artist may make his drawing of any size he wishes; it is not cut to
-pieces but preserved, and if it is properly drawn, as I have explained
-to you, it should produce in complicated work a more faithful result.
-In simple line work it is almost impossible to tell a wood engraving
-from a process block.
-
-The drawbacks are that the line is sometimes too faithfully
-copied--that the engraving is shallow, and that the wood yields a
-richer, fatter effect than any metal, mechanical block.
-
-These are artistic drawbacks, but they may all be overcome by the
-artist. The line, if good, cannot be too faithfully copied; the
-engraving, if shallow, can be made deeper, engraved anew by the wood
-engraver. The fat line so much prized was made with a brush, and, as I
-have said, brush work reproduces perfectly. And in the majority of
-cases the original wood or process blocks are never printed from, but
-casts of them called stereotypes or electrotypes are used; therefore
-the fat line of the wood is more or less the product of the
-imagination. I do not mean to say the original wood or metal block
-will not give a richer impression than any cast from it, but I do say
-it is only in the case of proofs that the original is used.
-
-If a pencil or other drawing in line is to be reproduced, in which
-the varying colour of the pencil mark is to be retained, its greyness
-for example, or if the pen line is very delicate, or there are many
-single unsupported lines in the drawing, another method must be
-employed. A microscopically ruled glass screen, ruled with fine lines
-made with a diamond and filled in with ink, is placed in the camera in
-front of the glass plate on which the picture is to be photographed.
-There are various ways in which this is done, with the object of
-breaking up into line the tones which would otherwise print perfectly
-black, or, of supporting those weak lines which would print too
-heavily. This negative thus obtained is printed on to the zinc or
-copper plate, is then etched much as in the case of the simple line
-block. This process, usually called half-tone, was invented for
-reproducing wash, but is much used now for line, especially when the
-dots or line of the screen are cut away by the wood engraver in the
-whites. The photo engraver is now endeavouring so to shift or adjust
-his screen that the dots will come only where they are wanted to break
-up the solid black, and some most interesting results have been
-obtained. When I am describing the reproduction of wash drawings, I
-shall return to this subject.
-
-Spaces of tint on line drawings can be and almost always are obtained
-by the use of what is known as shading mediums; that is, pieces of
-gelatine or copper with lines or dots engraved in them are filled with
-printer's ink, and these lines or dots are transferred by the engraver
-to the parts of the picture on the zinc plate where they are wanted
-before the plate is etched. There are many ways in which the artist
-can get the same effect by inking bits of silk and pressing them on
-the drawing, by inking his thumb, or by drawing with a pencil or
-chalk or even pen over a rough book-cover, the only object is to get a
-bit of tone in a line drawing: in cheap work it is often very
-effective, in the best work it is usually out of place. All the artist
-need do is indicate the spot, or the outlines of the parts where the
-tint is wanted, by a blue pencil. If the engraver knows how the block
-is to be printed he will use the tint that will print best. They are
-all useful, but not very sympathetic.
-
-Photo-Lithography and kindred methods are either of little importance
-or will be referred to under Lithography. Finally, if the lines are
-too black or too strong they can be cut away or thinned, or darks
-opened up by the engraver, just as on a wood block; or a little wheel
-in a handle called a roulette may be run over parts of the engraving
-which are too heavy--the teeth of the wheel break the lines into dots
-and lighten them.
-
-
-
-
-LECTURE V.
-
-_THE MAKING OF WASH DRAWINGS AND THEIR REPRODUCTION BY MECHANICAL
-PROCESS._
-
-
-When I speak of wash drawings, I would really refer to all painting or
-drawing, in colour or monochrome, in tone, as distinguished from work
-in line, which was the subject of my last lecture.
-
-Many persons do not like line work, never master it, and are
-insensible to its beauty when they see it. For these there is another
-method of expression, although, I cannot repeat too often, an
-illustrator should be able to work in more ways than one. One may make
-one's illustration in colour in oil, in gouache, in body colour, in
-wash; in fact paint a picture in the usual way, though, even with the
-best and most careful methods of reproduction, it will be almost
-invariably found that in the various stages of photographing, etching
-and printing, very much, if not all, the charm has disappeared, even
-though the result be printed in colour, for up to the present no
-colour can be perfectly reproduced, or rendered into black and white,
-even by the best engraver in the world. And no colour can be
-reproduced except by the artist himself. A few men like Detaille, De
-Neuville, and Lynch have, I believe, invented a special colour scheme
-for the requirements of colour reproduction, and some of the
-engravings made from their pictures by Messrs. Boussod, Valladon & Co.
-are very wonderful; but in the best examples I imagine there is an
-enormous amount of careful touching up and going over by hand, which
-places these reproductions in the category of proofs rather than of
-prints. Certainly there is a vast difference between them and the
-colour work usually seen in the same firm's commercial publications,
-good as they are, and there is a yawning gulf between these and the
-colour print we have with us always. Therefore, if you wish to work in
-oil I would suggest that you work in monochrome, and further I would
-advise you to make your designs in simple black and white--that is if
-the reproduction is to be printed with black ink; for the nearer your
-original is to the colour in which it is to be printed, the nearer
-will the engraver and printer be able to approach it. I would also
-suggest that perfectly dead colours should be used, because varnish or
-any sort of glaze, shine or glitter, will tell in the photograph, and
-even the most careful engravers are rather given to reproducing the
-photographic copy than the original, even though the latter be at
-their side.
-
-One method, that has been successful lately, is mixing oil colour with
-turpentine until it flows like water, and then working on paper; this
-reproduces most excellently, the only drawback being that the colour
-rubs off easily.
-
-Body colour and gouache are much used; the only thing to be remembered
-is that you should keep to the same colours and the same method of
-work all the way through each drawing. It is very interesting to
-combine body colour with wash; often in the original design the
-combination is most pleasing, but the camera does not approve of it,
-and frequently plays the most unexpected tricks with these
-combinations. Therefore, either stick to body colour, lamp black,
-ivory black and white,[3] or pure wash; in the latter case there is
-nothing which photographs so well as charcoal grey, made by Newman &
-Co. The most delicate washes reproduce beautifully. It is rather hard
-to manage, but once you can manage it, it is almost perfect. It is
-best for work in a very light key, in the extreme darks it is liable
-to get heavy and sombre and gritty; and if you want a positive black
-it is well to put it in with ink or some stronger black, even at the
-risk of knocking things rather out of tone. The only objection to
-charcoal grey is that it is rather difficult to work over it. Still,
-in illustration in wash you will always get a cleaner, sharper effect
-by doing your drawing at once, getting your effect right with the
-first wash, than by any amount of tinkering at it.
-
- [3] Winsor & Newton and Reeves have lately been experimenting in
- this way, and their Albanine and Process black are well spoken
- of by photo engravers.
-
-In this pure wash work you should be careful, very careful, not to
-let any meaningless pencil lines show through, as they always
-photograph, cannot be taken out, and at times spoil the whole effect;
-in fact, imperfections in wash drawings always reproduce more
-perfectly than the perfections themselves, and it is well to keep your
-paper reasonably clean, to avoid smudging, blots and lines, or
-otherwise you will be disappointed in the result. It is often very
-effective in an original drawing to put in a lot of colour, but it
-nearly always comes out wrongly in the reproduction. On the other
-hand, although body colour often comes badly with wash, if you work
-over or into either your wash or body colour with pen, chalk, or
-pencil of the same substance as the wash, the result is harmonious
-often and excellent. I mean, if you make a drawing in wash with Indian
-ink and work on it with liquid Indian ink in a pen, the result will
-be right. If you touch up charcoal grey with charcoal, the wash and
-line unite--these things, however, you will soon learn by experience,
-even though that experience is gained in a rather painful manner.
-Still, at present the better magazines and papers are not a practising
-ground for students, as they were some time ago, and you must be able
-to do good work before you can expect any intelligent editor to print
-it.
-
-Drawings or paintings--in fact all work in tone is reproduced
-mechanically by what is known as the half-tone process, which I
-referred to briefly in my last lecture.
-
-The drawing is photographed, but in front of the sensitised glass, a
-microscopically ruled screen is placed to break up this tone into dots
-or lines, really to get the same effect as the wood engraver obtains
-with his dots and lines. Otherwise, the tones being flat, or even if
-they are gradated, would print as a black mass; but these screens
-break up the masses into little squares, which receive the printing
-ink on their faces, and the colour or original effect of the picture
-is thus preserved. It is rather difficult to explain this, but the
-screen produces white lines in the darks and dark lines in the whites;
-you can see them by looking at any block. Afterwards, the process is
-exactly the same as for line drawings. This reproduction of wash work
-is very uncertain; good effects are obtained, about as often as
-failures. The delicate tones are not infrequently altogether lost.
-There are no positive blacks or whites, but a uniform grey tint covers
-the entire block, in which all delicacy is often hidden. Therefore, to
-get a good effect, when printed, the drawing should be simply made,
-that is if it is for cheap engraving and rapid printing; but if for
-the best books and magazines, wood engravers may be employed to
-remedy the imperfections of the photograph and the mistakes of the
-etcher. That is, whites may be cut, blacks toned down, lines thinned,
-or large spaces on the block may be left for the engraver to work
-upon: most remarkable results may be seen in the better American
-magazines.
-
-There are many qualities in a drawing which that senseless machine,
-the camera, will never reproduce. There are also a few points which it
-is very difficult (in tone work) for an engraver to render, but they
-may both combine and obtain most interesting effects.
-
-For instance, it is very difficult to give in a wood engraving the
-look of paint on canvas, without losing much of the picture itself,
-for if the wood engraver begins to try to imitate texture he not
-infrequently loses the subject. The mechanical process seems to do
-this very easily, especially if the brush marks on the canvas are at
-all prominent. But the delicacy is frequently lost; so, too, are the
-strong blacks, though a good wood engraver can remedy these defects by
-treating the metal block just as though it was wood, engraving on it,
-cutting out, save where it is right, all the mechanical look. But two
-factors are necessary, first a good engraver, and, second, a publisher
-who is willing to pay for this engraving, which is expensive. The
-majority of publishers will not do so, though they will pay for the
-work of a good or notorious author. They will employ a feeble artist,
-a poor engraver, and a cheap printer, and talk of how much better the
-work was done thirty years ago. Of course it was; it was decently
-drawn and mostly badly engraved, vilely printed, but well paid for;
-now the photograph is the standard and the results are all about us;
-therefore you must think of the results. So make broad simple masses,
-keep your work as flat as you can, remembering that all blacks will
-have the little white dots of the screen more or less showing through
-them--these can be kept out by the engraver, but they certainly will
-appear in the cheapest work; remembering that all delicate grey tones
-will be eaten up by the screen, therefore don't put them in if you can
-help it; and, finally, that unless whites are cut out they will never
-appear, instead you will have a dotted grey effect.
-
-In the very near future many of these imperfections will disappear,
-for you must remember that it is scarcely ten years since half tone
-began to be used at all. But look, whenever you see them--and they are
-everywhere--at the reproductions of half-tone work; try and study out
-how the artist got his effect; go to the art editor who published the
-drawing and ask to see the original. Talk with artists who do good
-work in black and white; they are mostly human, intelligent, and
-willing to help and advise you. Go to the engravers' shops and find
-out what the engraver will tell you, and to printing offices and see
-your work on the press.
-
-I have already spoken of the reproductions of line drawings by the
-half-tone process. One is sometimes tempted to wish that all line work
-could be reproduced by half tone and tone work could be reproduced by
-line, because if the line is delicate or the drawing is thin, the
-screen over it gives a tint which is pleasing, at times makes it look
-like an etching somewhat, especially if the tint be judiciously cut
-out. You might look at some of C. D. Gibson's work, where very great
-delicacy has been obtained in this way. Engravers are now endeavouring
-to get the tint just where it is wanted, and I have no doubt they will
-succeed. When they do, photo-engraving by the half-tone process will
-be greatly improved.
-
-Finally, study the requirements of the process not only as artists,
-but from the point of view of the engraver; go down to his shop and
-find out how the work is done; make him show and tell you; insist on
-seeing proofs of your drawings--good proofs, too; make corrections on
-them, first learning what corrections can be made. You cannot have
-blacks put in your engravings if they did not exist in the drawings,
-and, roughly speaking, you can only tone down, not strengthen any
-engraving; but you will find, save in cases of blacks, it is only
-toning down that the engraving wants, thinning and greying of lines.
-
-All this, I have no doubt, is very dry and uninteresting and tedious,
-but unless you get these things into your heads in the beginning, your
-drawings will not photograph well, engrave well, or print well; and if
-they don't, you will not get any illustration to do, and you may have
-yourselves to blame for it.
-
-
-
-
-LECTURE VI.
-
-_REPRODUCTION OF DRAWINGS BY WOOD ENGRAVING._
-
-
-Wood engraving, as a fine art, has been virtually invented, developed,
-brought to apparent perfection, and yet ceased to exist, temporarily,
-almost, as a trade, in this century.
-
-A wood engraving is an engraving made with a graver, upon a cross
-section of box-wood, that is upon the end, and not the side, of a
-plank, in relief. As in the case of mechanical engraving, all the
-wood, excepting that underneath the design upon the block, is cut
-away, and the picture remains alone in relief, raised upon the
-surface of the block of the same height as the type; thus the block
-may be placed on the press and printed with the type.
-
-The first great wood engraver was Thos. Bewick, and he, unlike many of
-his followers to-day, was an artist, and mostly made his own drawings
-on the block and cut them as he wished. He saw that wood engraving was
-a substitute for the slower, more tedious, and more expensive method
-of steel engraving; that, most important, many of the qualities of
-steel could be imitated in wood, as the same tools were used; that it
-could be printed with type; and, save that the richness of colour
-could not be retained, that it had most of the advantages of metal and
-few of its disadvantages, and was vastly cheaper. From the first, the
-imitation of steel was considered the proper aim, and though early in
-this century Stothard drew with a pen upon the block, and his designs
-were facsimiled in the wood by Clennell, the prevailing fashion was
-the imitation of steel engraving, even by Bewick himself. Many of his
-lines are exactly those used by the steel engravers. By the middle of
-the century steel engraving virtually disappeared, its practitioners
-being unable to compete with wood engravers. There have been but few
-original engravers in this form of art, and though the work of some of
-the steel engravers who reproduced Turner and Roberts, Wilkie and
-Landseer, is marvellous, the art is almost dead at present. Cheapness
-has killed it. Wood engraving also killed lithography--a lithograph
-cannot be printed with type--and consequently the wood engraver became
-a most important person. He ran a shop with many assistants; he
-commissioned artists to make drawings for his assistants to engrave,
-he dictated the way in which these drawings were to be done, the way
-in which the lines were to be drawn and washes made, so that they
-could be cut most easily. He commissioned writers to work up or down
-to the artists; he printed the books and sold them to the publishers,
-who were content to put their names on the title pages. And by this
-method much good and more bad work was accomplished, but the engraver
-finally became supreme, autocratic, dictatorial, insufferable; and
-then he vanished, as a shop. Process stepped in, in its turn, on
-account of its cheapness; and to-day, unless the engraver is an
-artist, he is but the slave of the process man, a hard fate--but his
-own. Before the introduction of photography, artists had to make their
-designs for the wood engraver the size they were wanted upon the block
-of wood, if portraits of places, reverse them, in pen, brush, pencil,
-or wash; the engraver cut around and through these designs, making a
-translation of them in relief on the block which could be printed
-from. But the drawing had disappeared, and the artist had nothing but
-the engraving to show for it, hence endless difficulties arose; good
-artists hated to have their drawings cut to pieces; good engravers
-hated to have their work criticised unfavourably; also, drawing of a
-small size, and in reverse on the block was difficult to learn, and
-only a mechanical craft of no artistic advantage when learned.
-Therefore, as soon as it was possible to escape from the drudgery, to
-draw of any size on paper and have that drawing photographed on to a
-sensitised wood block, of the size it was wanted, in reverse, all
-artists took to it. And a new school of engravers arose, men who tried
-to invent new methods of engraving so that they could express the
-medium, as well as the subject, in which a picture was produced. True
-from Stothard onward, through Meissonier and Menzel, engravers had
-tried to render pen and pencil drawings in line on wood; now
-everything began to be attempted, charcoal, etchings, steel, water
-colours, lithographs, oils. All the imperfections, accidents, and
-blemishes were preserved, even if the picture disappeared. But a
-number of most distinguished artist wood engravers appeared,
-especially in America, though few of them learned their trade in that
-country. But they received more encouragement, better pay, better
-printing, and better artists worked for them. And so the school of
-American wood engravers, many of whom are not Americans, was born.
-
-Now how is the modern work done? The artist's picture in any medium,
-of any size, is given to the photographer, who copies and reverses it,
-prints it on the block of wood which has been sensitised for that
-purpose. The print is usually not very good, that is, it is darker,
-with many of the qualities of the drawing lost; but it serves only as
-a guide or a tracing for the engraver, who takes his tools, and with
-the drawing behind him, reflected in a mirror to reverse it, proceeds
-to cut the photograph of the drawing into relief, at the same time
-trying to preserve the look of the canvas, paper, or metal on which it
-was made, and the feeling of the colour, wash, or paint with which it
-was executed. All this is most difficult, but a most artistic result
-may be obtained, and one has but to refer to the magazines of America
-and some of the weekly papers of Germany, France, and Spain, for a
-proof of it.
-
-Here, though much good wood engraving has been printed, outside the
-offices of Messrs. Macmillan, Cassell and Co., and the _Graphic_, it
-has of late years been mostly in the form of copies, electrotypes,
-clichés from foreign blocks which are supplied by their makers, all
-over the world, at a very low price, because they are not reserved for
-any one paper or book. And when you begin to see a man's painting, or
-drawing, or engraving in every paper, you begin to tire of him and his
-work. The editors of papers which publish clichés seem to be the only
-people who like the multiplication and cheapening of art, but then
-there is no accounting for their tastes. The tools and appliances for
-making wood engravings are simple enough, but to engrave anything but
-_facsimile_ work, or your own designs, will necessitate your going
-through considerable practical training; probably some years of
-apprenticeship.
-
-To cut line drawings on the wood, or to cut designs in large simple
-masses, you do not require so much practice. All the tools you need
-are different sized gravers and gouges, a small chisel to cut large
-spaces, an engraver's rest for the block, so that it can be turned
-freely and easily about, and a whetstone to sharpen your tools.
-
-Lamps and globes for water, shades for your eyes, you will scarcely
-need, but a magnifying glass, something like that which watchmakers
-use, may be useful. With these simple tools and some box-wood--they
-can all be bought in East Harding Street or at any colour maker's--you
-have the necessary appliances.
-
-If you draw on the block, a slight wash of Chinese white will help to
-make it work easily. Draw with a brush or pencil; or if in wash,
-without body colour, as that will chip off. You have only to remember
-that the block, either plain or with the drawing on it, would print
-perfectly black, and that every line you make with the graver in the
-surface of it, will print white. Therefore, as I have said, to get an
-outline engraving, you simply cut away everything but the drawing,
-which is left in relief on the surface of the block, and which alone
-prints, the rest of it being cut away. It is not necessary to engrave
-the surface very deeply, only so much that neither the ink nor the
-paper will touch in the hollows between the lines or masses. Mistakes
-are not easy to remedy, except by making a hole in the block and
-inserting a plug of wood, and then engraving that afresh.
-
-The art of engraving in _facsimile_, that is, of engraving around
-lines made with pen, or brush, or pencil, is comparatively easy, it
-only requires much training and a steady hand. But the ability to
-translate a work in colour into black and white, on a wood block, so
-that it shall give a good idea of the original, is far more
-difficult. To do it well, the engraver must not only have the
-knowledge of the technical requirements of his craft at his finger
-ends, only to be gained after years of apprenticeship, but he must be
-a trained artist as well. If he wishes to get the best results, he
-must have the original before him, he must understand it and
-appreciate it. And finally, he must have the technical skill to
-engrave it. Even then, most likely, the artist will not like the
-block. It is a difficult art, a thankless art, save in the rarest
-cases: one which requires years of special training, and at present in
-this country, no matter how great an artist one is, there is very
-little chance to practise it. Work of this sort you cannot expect to
-be able to do without years of training; if you care for it you must
-apprentice yourself to a wood engraver.
-
-Still there are forms of wood engraving which you may take up, from
-the most primitive to the most complicated, and you may carry out the
-work from the designing of it to the printing of it yourselves, or,
-you may draw on the block and cut away, as in engravings by the late
-R. L. Stevenson (or were they done by Lloyd Osbourne or some other
-ghost?), and possibly you will have an experience like this:--
-
- "A blemish in the cut appears,
- Alas, it cost both blood and tears.
- The glancing graver swerved aside,
- Fast flowed the artist's vital tide,
- And now the apologetic bard
- Demands indulgence for his pard."
-
-Or I imagine without much trouble you might invent something in the
-style of Valloton, a Frenchman, who is resurrecting wood cutting in a
-manner of his own, while carrying on the traditions of the old men. I
-hope you may be able to get as much life and go in it as he has. Make
-your drawing on the wood, or on paper, have it photographed on the
-wood in the latter case, and cut around the lines, leaving only the
-drawing. The greatest difficulty is with fine lines, and you see how
-cleverly Valloton has avoided making them. Or, like Lepère, another
-French artist--he would be a man to study with--do big, bold,
-effective things; or again you might attempt, as he does, colour work
-on wood, like that done by the Japanese, drawing it, engraving it, and
-printing it all yourselves.
-
-Or, take up drawing and engraving in the manner of Caldecott, Crane,
-or Kate Greenaway, when they were reproduced and printed by Edmund
-Evans.
-
-Process is fighting for colour too, but wood, at least in proofs, and
-that is all you would care for, gives some qualities far beyond
-process.
-
-In colour printing from wood blocks as many blocks must be made as
-there are colours, and there must be as many separate printings made
-from these blocks as there are colours in the printed picture. There
-must also be an outline block called the key block. Usually in
-European colour printing, whether from wood blocks, or by lithography,
-or even process, the colours are printed on top of each other; for
-example, a blue is printed over a yellow to get green, and at times
-several colours are superimposed, with the result that colour is lost
-and mud obtained. The Japanese have shown us how to make colour
-prints, however, and their method is now adopted by all intelligent
-colour printers. It consists in making the right colour before it is
-put on the block, and in placing the colours side by side like a
-mosaic. The work is done somewhat in this way; the artist makes his
-drawing, several tracings (as many as there are colours) are made from
-it, and one extra tracing must be made of the outline only. Or rather
-the outline alone is cut on the block, other blocks are then made for
-each colour, or the parts cut out of the same block; one will contain
-all the red, another all the blue, a third the yellow, and so on. They
-must be very accurately cut, so as to fit together and print truly,
-and you can see from Japanese prints how wonderfully well the work is
-done. Of course the editions from such blocks are very limited, and on
-this account, like etchings, often vary, the printers having tried
-experiments in colour. The grain of the wood is taken advantage of in
-printing, as it often gives a lovely pattern; a good printer will wash
-in gradated skies with the backgrounds, and no matter how wonderfully
-they are worked, if of the same colour, are printed usually from the
-same block. The Japanese, I believe, use water-colours; certainly the
-French and English, who have tried to imitate them, do, putting the
-colour, mixed with a little size or gum, on the face of the block with
-a sponge; in fact they are printed water-colours. Several Frenchmen
-have obtained in this way most notable results. Very similar was the
-fashion of colour printing called chiaroscuro, used in the early part
-of the century. The trouble with this was that the oil with which the
-inks were mixed, either ran, or spoiled the pages, or did not dry
-well. Drawings on grey paper in chalk can be wonderfully imitated in
-this way, and there are methods of using steel and copper plates,
-bitten into relief to get outlines or tints, which were also employed.
-To-day in the printing of wood engravings and process blocks by
-steam, at many thousands an hour, the same system of colour printing,
-by placing the colours side by side, is being attempted, for it is
-impossible to obtain fine tone or rich effect by placing one colour on
-top of another, even in slow printing by hand, while it is absurd to
-attempt it rapidly by steam. In the most successful attempts yet made,
-those of the _Le Quotidien Illustré_ and _Le Rire_, Paris papers,
-colour printing from process blocks has been most successfully done,
-and I do not doubt that in a very few years colour printing in
-magazines and newspapers will be very general.
-
-As I have said, all intelligent printers have now come to the
-conclusion that simple flat colours, put on side by side, will alone
-give good artistic results; they have only learned this, however,
-after going quite to the other extreme: after trying to get pure
-colour and rich effects by using the three primary colours on top of
-each other, they obtained but crudeness, vulgarity, and mud.
-
-Photography and chemistry are useful in art, but art cannot be created
-by these means. It may be that some one, some day, will be able to
-photograph a picture in colour, but there is as yet no evidence of it.
-
-Wood engravings may also be made by scraping or lowering the fronts or
-backs of blocks, and rich, soft, fat effects can be produced. Very
-little has been done, I think, with these lowered blocks, some
-remarkable examples of which can be seen in Chatto and Jackson's
-"History of Wood Engraving."
-
-Photography has aided the artist very much in wood engraving (though
-most engravers say it has not), and especially in colour printing it
-can be made great use of; as, instead of tracing a design on to
-several blocks, it can be photographed, thus ensuring accuracy--though
-the Japanese obtained this without any photographic aids--and saving
-much time.
-
-Still, that is about as far as it goes at present, and photography
-will never supersede art, though it is engaged in a famous struggle
-with artlessness.
-
-
-
-
-LECTURE VII.
-
-_LITHOGRAPHY._
-
-
-Lithography, for some time the rival of metal engraving and even for a
-time of wood, was invented at the end of the last century, and, as its
-name implies, is the art of drawing or writing upon stone. Briefly, a
-peculiar grained stone, found in Germany, may be drawn upon with
-greasy chalk or ink; afterward it is slightly etched, only washed
-really, with weak nitric acid and water to fix the drawing and
-somewhat reduce the surface of the stone; if the stone be now covered
-with gum, allowed to dry, and then inked, the ink adheres only to the
-drawing; and if a sheet of paper is placed on it, and the whole passed
-through a press, a print, or rather the drawing in ink, will come off
-on the paper. This is roughly the art of lithography.
-
-The most important consideration for you, however, is the making of
-the drawing. This may be done in one of two ways: either upon the
-stone itself, or upon transfer paper specially coated, so that the
-entire drawing is transferred from the paper on which it is drawn, by
-mechanical means, to the stone, and not merely a print from the
-original drawing. For many reasons it would probably be best to draw
-upon the stone itself always; because, first and above all, the less
-intervention--even mechanical intervention--there is between the
-artist and his work, the better; and in many cases it is not possible
-to get good results unless the artist works on the stone. But if one
-has to make a large drawing out of doors, it is obviously impossible
-to carry about a big and heavy stone with one; therefore lithographic
-transfer paper must be used if the work is to be done from nature.
-
-Before this paper was perfected (it is very good now, and can be
-obtained from Hughes & Kimber of West Harding Street, though Belfont's
-of Paris is the best), the artist either copied his sketches, studies,
-or pictures himself, on the stone, if he understood lithography; or
-else his drawings were copied for him by some other artists who were
-trained lithographers. One most notable example of this is to be found
-in J. F. Lewis's "Alhambra." The originals by Lewis were redrawn on
-the stone by J. D. Harding, J. Lane, and W. Ganci, as well as by Lewis
-himself; inevitably some of these men's individuality was apparent,
-and even in the case of Lewis, much must have been lost by copying
-his own designs; and if original work is given to professional
-lithographers, in ninety-nine cases out of one hundred all the real
-character is taken out of it. To-day, however, one may draw upon
-transfer paper, being careful only not to touch it with one's fingers,
-either in lithographic chalk or lithographic ink, which is only the
-chalk rubbed down and put on with a pen or brush, on this paper, which
-should be fastened down like an oil sketch, in a box having a cover,
-by drawing pins. Take the drawing to the printer; he will put it on
-the stone and print it for you far better than you can do it yourself;
-still this is rather expensive, as the transferring of the drawing to
-the stone and pulling a few proofs will cost you about a guinea. But
-if your design can be drawn in your own studio, or at the
-lithographer's, on the stone, it is not only much simpler, but the
-result may be better, and you can employ more varied methods of work.
-For example, you may draw with the lithographic crayon--Lemercier's
-are the best; get them at Lechertier & Barbe's--just as you would with
-ordinary chalk or crayon. For if the stone is grained like paper, the
-design, if well printed, should look almost exactly like a drawing on
-paper. On a smooth or ungrained stone you may draw or write with pen
-or brush and lithographic ink, which is only the crayon rubbed down
-with gum arabic, or ammonia and water, as you would rub down Indian
-ink, only you must heat the saucer in which you are rubbing it, a
-little. When you have done this, use Gillott's lithographic pens,
-putting the ink on the pen with a brush, or use a trimmed sable brush
-brought to a fine point; you must make your lines carefully, and get
-your ink of the right consistency, otherwise it tends to blot and
-spread or smear. Again, you may mix more of the medium with the
-rubbed-down crayon. I should say it rubs, when warm, without water;
-this medium may be obtained ready mixed from Way & Sons, Wellington
-Street, Strand; paint with it as you would in water colours, adding
-more of the medium or more ink as you wish little or much colour. I
-have tried only a couple of experiments in this way, and they were
-both complete failures. The trouble I found was this: in making light
-tones, the moment the brush charged with colour touches the stone, the
-stone itself turns much darker than the colour you are putting on it;
-and as it dries out very slowly, the making of a wash drawing is a
-most tedious process, unless one has had enough experience of the work
-to know just the effect of the finished drawing, or rather just the
-effect of the wash applied, which cannot be seen in its proper tone,
-while working on the stone, since the appearance the stone presents so
-long as it is wet is absolutely different to what it will look like
-when dry, and it is almost impossible to work over washes, because the
-colour floats off if they are gone over again, or at least smudges and
-smears; still, corrections and additions can be made with the crayon
-point, and the whole design brought pretty well together. The best
-work in wash has been done by Lunois, a Frenchman. Corrections are at
-all times difficult to make in lithographs, the error having to be
-scratched out and the stone repaired in that spot, before the new work
-can be put in again.
-
-Stump drawings may be made by getting the crayon in powder and
-smearing it on the stone in masses with a rag. Effects can be obtained
-by removing too much colour with ordinary scrapers and putting in
-modelling with stumps and the point of the crayon; or all three of
-the methods I have mentioned may be combined, as they often are, on
-the same stone, notably in the work of Hervier.
-
-Tints may be obtained by stippling and splatter work, as in pen
-drawings. There is a machine called an air brush, used by
-lithographers for this purpose, but the introduction of mechanical
-dodges has done much to harm lithography.
-
-Zinc may be grained and drawn upon in the same way; why this metal is
-not more generally used, I do not know, for it is much lighter, more
-portable, and can be easily mounted on a plain stone to print from.
-
-Until lately it was maintained that only what was drawn on stone could
-be got off it in a print. But Mr. Goulding, the etching printer, who
-has been making a series of experiments, says he can get almost as
-much variety of effect, by wiping the surface of the stone carefully,
-in a small number of prints, as he can from a copper plate (_see_
-Lecture on the printing of Etchings). Still, for you, the process
-ordinarily will end with the drawing. Even the transferring is only to
-be successfully done by skilled workmen, and until you can print an
-etching decently, it would be scarcely worth while to try a
-lithograph.
-
-Considering that the process is perfectly autographic, that the
-materials are few and cheap, it is strange that it is so little
-employed at present. But a very serious attempt is being made to
-revive it, and as an artist like Mr. Whistler is the leader and
-initiator, I believe it will be successful.
-
-Colour printing by lithography, though very complicated, might be
-tried by you; as many stones must be prepared for transferring the
-design, made either on paper or stone, from the paper to stone, or
-from one stone to another, as there are colours, and only that part of
-the design which is of one colour must appear on one stone; if you try
-to get colour prints in the usual fashion by printing one colour over
-the other, you will obtain the usual commercial muddling lithographic
-appearance. But if you mix your own colours for the lithographer, and
-have the colours placed side by side, in flat masses like the Japanese
-block prints (_see_ Wood Engraving Lecture), you should get good
-results.
-
-There are endless other processes and methods of work, but they are
-all more or less complicated, and require special training and special
-tools, and even machinery, and one who wishes to pursue the subject
-further must go to a lithographer and learn the trade.
-
-But in order to get artistic effects only, one has but to draw or
-paint on paper or stone as one would ordinarily. The means are most
-simple, and the results should be most interesting.
-
-
-
-
-LECTURE VIII.
-
-_ETCHING._
-
-
-In all the various methods of making illustrations to which I have so
-far called your attention, it was necessary that some part of the work
-should be done by a specially trained craftsman, at least if any
-practical and commercial result was desired.
-
-Now in etching, the more you yourselves do and the less any one else
-does, the better should be the result.
-
-An etching is, in its narrowest sense, a print from a metal plate into
-which a design has been bitten or eaten by acid; again, in most of the
-other methods, the printing was from relief blocks like type, and
-therefore those illustrations could be printed with type. Now we have
-to consider another sort of work, namely, intaglio, or incised, or
-sunken work not printed from the surface, but from lines cut below it,
-and therefore unavailable for letterpress printing. Of course it would
-be easy to make a relief block in metal, or an incised block of wood,
-to reverse the treatment in printing, but it would not be natural or
-right.
-
-The whole difference is this: if a wood block has a line cut in the
-surface and the whole face is inked with a roller, the line will print
-white and the rest of the block black. If the etching plate is inked
-and cleaned off, as is always done, it will print white; if a line is
-cut in it, the ink will remain in that and produce a black line. Of
-course they must be printed in appropriate presses.
-
-In its broadest sense an etching may be produced in any one of a
-number of ways, by the artist, on a metal plate which may be printed
-from.
-
-It is never a process or mechanical engraving, and never was and never
-will be, and the attempt to palm off mechanical blocks or plates is a
-swindle and a humbug.
-
-Etchings are produced in the following manner; at least this is the
-best and simplest method.
-
-A plate of highly polished copper, zinc, or even steel, iron, or
-aluminium is obtained from the makers, William Longman, of Johnson's
-Court, Fleet Street, or from Messrs. Hughes & Kimber, West Harding
-Street, Fetter Lane, or Messrs. Roberson, 99, Long Acre. Copper,
-however, is the best and almost universally used. This should be
-carefully cleaned with a soft rag and whiting; then it should be
-gripped by a vice with a wooden handle, in one corner, care being
-taken to put a piece of soft paper between the vice and the plate to
-keep the teeth of the former from scratching it; heated, either upon
-an iron frame with a spirit or Bunsen lamp under it, or over the gas,
-until, if you take a ball of etching ground and touch the plate with
-it, the ground melts. This ground is made of resin, wax, and gum; the
-best is made by Sellers in England and Cadart in France. All these
-materials can be bought of Roberson or Hughes & Kimber. Touch the hot
-plate in several places with the ground. It should melt at once; then
-take an American etching roller (which I think you can only obtain at
-Roberson's) and go over the plate rapidly with it in every direction,
-until the little masses of melted ground have been spread evenly and
-thinly in a film all over it. With a little practice you should be
-able to do this in a couple of minutes, and you can lay in this way
-(which is unknown virtually in England) a thinner, harder, more even
-and very much better ground, with less trouble, than in any other.
-Heat the plate again a little more, and take a bundle of wax tapers
-twisted together by heating them, light them and pass them under the
-face of the plate held, varnished side downwards, by the vice; do not
-touch the plate with the taper, or the varnish, being still melted,
-will come off, but go rapidly back and forward, allowing the flame
-only to touch the surface. In a few minutes the varnish will have been
-completely blackened by the smoke. Next, take a bottle of stopping-out
-varnish (which you may as well buy; don't bother to make it) and cover
-the back and edges of the plate. If this is done while the plate is
-hot, it dries very fast, and as soon as the plate is cool it is ready
-to work on.
-
-This is the first stage. The waxy ground is put on to protect the
-plate from the acid with which it is to be bitten, and it must be so
-well made and well put on, that one can draw through it, without
-tearing it up and without any resistance; also it must adhere firmly
-to the plate, where it is not drawn through, and must resist the acid
-perfectly in the untouched parts. The smoking is done to enable you to
-see your lines in the copper, light on dark; this is rather curious at
-first, but you will get used to it. The stopping-out varnish is also
-to protect the plate, and is only a cheaper sort of ground dissolved
-in oil of lavender or ether. When the plate is cool, it should be of a
-brilliant uniform black, and if there are any dull, smoky-looking
-places on it, the ground is burnt. Here the ground may be rubbed off,
-or will show cracks, if you touch it, in these places, and the varnish
-should be cleaned off the face with turpentine, the plate carefully
-dried and regrounded. Otherwise the varnish will either crack while
-you are drawing on it, or come off in the bath of acid, and your work
-will be spoiled.
-
-You draw upon the varnished plate with needles or points; any steel
-points will do, from a knitting-needle to the best big point you can
-get. The small needles invented by Mr. Whistler I find the best; but
-this is a personal liking. They are of all shapes and sizes. You may
-commence and draw in your entire subject, only remembering that you
-must leave your foreground lines further apart than those in the
-distance.
-
-You may make your drawing either with the same needle, all over, or
-with needles of different sizes; for though one half of the art is in
-the drawing, the other half, and the really characteristic half, is in
-the biting. There is very little to be said about the drawing, save
-that you must draw just as well as ever you can; you will find out
-almost immediately that you have the most responsive tool in your
-fingers, and that you can work with it in any direction. Do not
-bother, if you use the same needle, because the drawing looks flat,
-and the lines are of the same width; the biting will fix all that.
-Draw away; if you are afraid to tackle the copper straight away with a
-point, paint your design on it, with a little Chinese white, or, if
-you have a pencil drawing of the subject, you may make a tracing from
-it, and go over that, transferring it to the plate; or you may turn
-the drawing face down and run it through a copper plate press; the
-drawing will come off on the varnished surface in reverse, and if you
-are doing a portrait of a place you must otherwise reverse it
-yourself. If you wish to sketch from nature in reverse, put up a
-mirror on an easel, and turn your back to the subject, drawing from
-the picture in the mirror, for, you must remember, that any subject
-drawn, as you see it, on a copper plate, or even a wood-block, prints
-in reverse.
-
-Next, to bite or etch the drawing into the copper plate, take equal
-parts of nitric acid and water and mix them in a glass-stoppered
-bottle, some hours before you wish to use the mixture, for there is
-enough heat produced by the chemical action to melt the ground if it
-is used at once.
-
-Or have a quantity of what is known as Dutch mordant made; this is
-composed of--
-
- Two parts Chlorate of Potash,
- Ten parts Hydrochloric Acid,
- Eighty-eight parts water.
-
-Next, get an ordinary photographer's porcelain or rubber bath or tray;
-lay the plate in it, pour the acid over it; in a few seconds bubbles
-will arise, in all the lines; brush them away with a feather; leave
-the plate, if there is any fine work on it, in the bath for only two
-or three minutes, say for a light sky; take it out with rubber
-finger-tips or a stick, for the acid will burn your fingers and a drop
-will rot your clothes, staining them light yellow; wash the plate
-thoroughly in clean water, dry it carefully with blotting-paper. Take
-some of your stopping-out varnish, thin it with a little (a very
-little) turpentine, paint over the very lightest parts of the drawing
-with a camel's-hair brush dipped in the diluted varnish, and thus stop
-them out--that is, stop them from biting any more by painting them
-with the varnish. Wait till the places where you have painted the
-varnish are thoroughly dry; then put the plate in the bath again and
-bite the next stronger, nearer set of lines; of course, save where the
-lines are covered by the stopping-out varnish, they will keep on
-biting. Continue biting and stopping out till you get to the
-foreground, where the lines should now be quite broad and deep; take
-off the ground front and back by washing it with a rag dipped in
-turpentine, dry it, and the plate is ready to print from.
-
-Another method is to commence by drawing in the darks, biting them,
-then drawing in the middle distance, the darks going on biting all the
-while, and finally the extreme distance, when the whole plate will be
-biting together; by this method no stopping out is necessary, but in
-working out of doors it is awkward to carry baths and acid around with
-one, otherwise one must run back to the studio, to bite between each
-stage. But these two methods can be mixed up, and frequently are, and
-you may also work in the bath, drawing lines through or over others,
-thus getting richness while the biting is going on. The bad fumes
-which are given off during the biting are not dangerous. In working
-with the Dutch mordant, which bites slower than nitric acid and makes
-no bubbles, but bites straight down, while nitric acid enlarges the
-lines laterally, you will inhale much of the fumes, but they won't
-hurt you. Although you do not see any action with the Dutch mordant,
-brush the lines with a feather, else a deposit is formed and they will
-bite unevenly.
-
-It is very difficult to tell when a plate is well bitten, the biting
-is very difficult, but on taking it out of the bath and holding it on
-a level with your eye, you can see the bitten lines; you can also feel
-the biting with a needle, and you may take off a bit of the varnish
-with your thumb-nail or turpentine and look at the lines, re-covering
-them again with the stopping-out varnish; but after this, of course,
-they will not bite in that place.
-
-Again, the lines do not bite evenly; where they are close together
-they bite faster, and, after the plate has been in the acid some
-time, it may change its speed of biting; differences of atmosphere and
-temperature affect it even with the same acid on the same day; if the
-nitric acid is too weak add more acid; if too strong pour in water,
-and quick, else the ground will come off: it is too strong when it
-boils and bubbles all over; it is too weak when there are no bubbles.
-Dutch mordant eats always slowly, and never, so far as I know,
-destroys the ground. At the last, for very strong darks, you may
-sometimes use a little pure nitric acid, but it will most likely tear
-up the ground, and if you leave it long enough will spoil all your
-lines, giving you only a great black hole. These are the systems
-employed by all etchers; the lengthy dissertations about white ground,
-silver ground, positive and negative processes, need not concern you,
-they are never practised, and mostly unknown to the best men. These
-simple directions should enable you to produce artistic plates, if you
-have the necessary ability. Still, when you have had a proof of your
-plate pulled--I will talk of printing in the next lecture--you will
-find that there are all sorts of imperfections in it, possibly holes,
-places where it is not bitten enough or too much bitten, or that it is
-too dark or too light all over; it is but seldom that a plate is right
-when the first proof is pulled. If you find a hole bitten in it, take
-a burnishing tool, flatten the hole down as much as possible, find the
-place on the back with a pair of calipers, hammer it up from the back,
-placing it on an anvil, burnish it again and polish the surface with
-charcoal, oil, and rags; revarnish the place, redraw, and rebite it.
-If it is only a small place you may take up some nitric acid on a
-feather, and paint the little spot to be rebitten with that. A few
-drops of the acid have nearly as much power as a great deal. In fact
-you may paint the face of your plate with acid and do your biting in
-that way, without ever immersing it in the bath at all. If it is too
-much bitten it must be rubbed down with charcoal and oil, a tedious
-process. If it is too light it must be rebitten all over; then take a
-rebiting roller, putting some liquid etching ground on a separate
-plate, take the ground up on the roller and roll the face of the plate
-very carefully; the ground should cover the face without going into
-any of the lines; heat it very slightly to dry the ground, leave it
-for a day or so and then bite as before. If there are places where
-lines want joining or little touches of dark would be effective, put
-them in with a graver or a point.
-
-You may use a graver altogether, and produce a line engraving; or a
-point, either steel or diamond, and make what is known as a dry-point
-etching, that is, merely a scratched drawing on the copper; the point
-throws up, as you draw with it, a furrow, which is greater or less as
-you incline the point, and this holds the ink, and is called burr, and
-gives for a few proofs great richness; a steel face can, however, be
-put on the copper plate, and any number of pulls may be taken. The
-difference between the cutting of lines with a graver and the drawing
-of them with a point is this: the graver, both in metal and wood, is
-pushed from one; the point in etching, and even the knives in wood
-cutting, are drawn toward one.
-
-Messrs. Roberson have invented a plate of celluloid which, for dry
-point work, seems to be fairly good, and as this plate is white or
-cream-coloured, as one draws on it the lines may be filled up with
-paint, and one may thus see the drawing as one works. Of course, the
-same thing may be done with dry point on copper. The great advantage
-of the celluloid is its lightness. It must not, however, be heated in
-printing, otherwise it will be ruined. Many etchers are now making
-experiments with aluminium, but no certain results have as yet been
-obtained.
-
-There are many other forms of engraving included under the title of
-Etching, although, properly speaking, they have nothing to do with it.
-
-Aquatint: a ground, made by depositing powdered resin in solution with
-spirits of wine, is poured on the plate, slightly heated, and as it
-dries the resin adheres to the plate and cracks up irregularly; a
-drawing may be made on this, and stopped out in the usual way. Or
-powdered resin may be sprinkled on the plate, heated, when it will
-adhere, or the plate may be placed in a box containing resin in very
-fine powder, heated, and the box shaken; the resin will settle on it
-and produce the ground.
-
-A very similar ground may be made by passing the ordinarily-grounded
-plate through a copper-plate printing-press, with a piece of sandpaper
-over it, three or four times, then the design may be painted on it in
-stopping-out varnish, and at times a very good result may be obtained.
-Lines may be put in, etched before the ground is laid; but personally
-I don't like the lines at all; without them the result is rather like
-a bitten painting. Silk and canvas can also be placed on the grounded
-plate, which is then run through the press, to get tints in the
-ground.
-
-Tints may be obtained after the plate is bitten by painting it with
-olive oil and sprinkling flowers of sulphur on it, which gives a very
-charming tint, but it does not last long; I believe that if acid is
-poured over it, it may last better. Mr. Frank Short says so, but I
-have never tried the experiment.
-
-Soft ground etchings are made by mixing etching ground and tallow
-together in equal proportions, covering the plate with this
-composition by means of the roller: that is, put some of the
-composition on a clean plate, pass the roller over it till it is
-covered with the soft ground, and then roll it on to the plate on
-which you propose to work, smoke it and then stretch a piece of
-rough-grained or lined drawing paper over the face, as paper is
-stretched for making water-colours, draw upon this with a lead pencil
-and then carefully take the paper off; you must not rest on or touch
-the plate with your fingers; the ground comes away with the paper
-where the pencil has passed, and the design is seen on the copper,
-and is then to be bitten in as in ordinary etching.
-
-Mezzotint is also included, for some unknown reason, with etching. The
-face of the plate is roughened in every direction by going over it
-with a toothed instrument called a rocker, until it will print
-perfectly black; the design is then traced on it; the drawing is made
-by scraping down the lights, and finally by burnishing the whites
-quite smooth.
-
-Tint effects can also be obtained by a smooth-toothed wheel, the
-roulette, the same as that used by process engravers; only here it
-produces blacks, while they use it to get lights.
-
-Monotypes, that is paintings made in colour or black and white on a
-bare copper plate in the usual way, though they must be handled
-thinly, may be passed through the press, and they will yield one
-exquisitely soft and delicate impression. The electrotyping and
-duplicating of them changes their character and value entirely: it is
-a ridiculous and inartistic proceeding.
-
-But after going through all this list,--I have barely referred to
-steel engraving in line, which, as I have said, is only working with
-an ordinary graver in steel, and is slow and tedious, unsatisfactory
-drudgery; or to stipple engraving, dotting and biting in dots, instead
-of lines, as practised by Bartolozzi,--one comes back to the simple
-method I described at first, the method with some improvements of
-Rembrandt, the method of Whistler, or in dry point the method of
-Helleu; and what is good enough for those masters should be good
-enough for you.
-
-
-
-
-LECTURE IX.
-
-_THE PRINTING OF ETCHINGS._
-
-
-Which is the more interesting and amusing--the drawing, biting, or
-printing of an etching has never been decided. But no artist is
-willing, if he can help it, to allow any one else, once he has
-mastered the method of work, to perform any part of the operation for
-him.
-
-The printing of an etching is, in theory, very simple; in practice, it
-is most difficult, but most delightful.
-
-The plate being bitten, as I have described in a previous lecture,
-must now be printed, for the prints from it, and not the plate
-itself, are the end of etching--really of all illustration.
-
-You will have to spend several pounds on an etching outfit, so you had
-better get a good one. The small ones, including press, ink,
-chemicals, quite complete, sold by Roberson, of 99, Long Acre, are
-most excellent as far as they go, for small plates, and taking round
-the country with one on a sketching tour; but for serious work, a more
-practical set of tools is necessary. Therefore I would advise you
-first to take lessons of a good etcher, who will allow you to work
-with him, or to go to a printer and get him to show you how the work
-is done.
-
-This is the method: the first thing to do is to obtain some good
-handmade paper, almost all old paper is excellent; it should be
-unruled, of course; often the tone of it is lovely, and it may contain
-most beautiful water-marks. I am referring to Dutch, French, English,
-or German papers of at least a century old. At times you may be able
-to pick up old ledgers, account-books, or packages of unprinted paper;
-treasure them up; if you don't print etchings on them, there is
-nothing more delightful to draw upon. There are also Japanese and
-India papers, which give most beautiful delicate translucent effect to
-prints. Vellum, parchment, and even silk or satin may be printed on.
-But as a general rule the old handmade Dutch paper is the most
-satisfactory, if you can get it. For ordinary work and experiments,
-modern paper is quite good enough, and very good handmade paper can be
-obtained from Roberson's. Let us suppose you are going to print;
-twenty-four hours before, take several sheets of paper, rather more
-than you want, in case of failure or for any other reason; cut the
-sheets the size you desire them, a little larger than the plate, so
-as to leave a decent margin. Cut the paper first; Japanese paper, for
-example, cannot easily be cut when it is wet. Get a sheet of window
-glass, lay it flat on a table, take the first sheet of paper and damp
-it on one side by passing a wet sponge over it, lay it on the glass;
-on top of this sheet lay another dry one; damp the top of that with
-the sponge; and continue laying down sheets and damping their upper
-faces till you have enough; put another sheet of window glass on the
-top, and a heavy weight upon it; in a day the whole mass should be
-completely dampened all through. I believe the same thing can be done
-by a copying press and book, and I have heard it is so done by
-lithographers, but the way I have described is the usual one that is
-followed by plate printers. The next thing is the press. A good
-secondhand one may be bought at Hughes & Kimber's, West Harding
-Street, Fetter Lane, for about five pounds. Much depends, however, on
-the size and finish. You should have it brought to your studio, set up
-and adjusted for you by skilled workmen. Then you must buy a heater
-and a jigger for your plates, ink, oil, canvas, and a number of other
-things, dabbers, a muller, an ink-slab, and a big palette knife; all
-these will run up a bill of ten pounds or so.
-
-But having your press and other things, let us go to work: light the
-gas-burners under the heater which you have bought; if too much flame
-comes out and makes the iron top too hot, plug up some of the jets.
-Put your plate on the top of the heater. First, however, see that your
-press is adjusted, so that the plate will fit in. To do this, put a
-piece of paper on the top of the plate and run it in the press to try
-it, and see if it goes under the roller without tearing the paper.
-Take some of the ink out of the can, or better, get it in powder, put
-it on the ink-slab and mix it with oil with the palette knife; then
-take the muller and grind the ink until it is thoroughly ground and
-mixed and of about the thickness of paint as it comes out of the tube.
-But each plate will require more or less oil or colour, and some
-brown, red, or possibly blue mixed with it to take off the crude raw
-look which pure black often has in the print. The plate being now
-warm, not so hot as to boil or burn the ink, dab with a dabber the ink
-from the slab all over the face of the plate (it is warmed to wipe the
-ink off easily), slide it from the heater to the wooden box called a
-jigger, which must be placed alongside the former. You should get a
-printer to arrange your things for you. Take a piece of the rag or
-canvas for wiping, double it carefully and loosely in your hand--this
-requires much practice--and remove all the ink which is on the
-surface of the plate. Even after you have wiped it some time, an oily
-film will remain, which, unless you polish the plate with whiting
-rubbed on your hand, you cannot remove, and you do not want to,
-because the oil gives a delicious tone to the print. Some ink may be
-left in places on the surface to increase and strengthen the work, but
-what you must learn to do is not to wipe any of the ink out of the
-bitten lines. This is very difficult, and if you do wipe it out, you
-must commence all over again, only the chances are that you will know
-nothing about this until the plate is printed. The colour may also be
-increased by going over the surface of the plate, having again warmed
-it, if it has become cool, with a bit of soft taffatas silk with a
-trembling muscular motion of the arm and fingers. This action, called
-retroussage, which must be seen to be understood, drags the ink
-slightly over the surface of the plate without taking much out of the
-lines.
-
-Now take off the weights from your paper, take up a sheet, which
-should be thoroughly damped, first brushing it with a soft brush to
-remove any drops of water or dirt or dust. The paper should be placed
-near the press. Put the plate face upwards on the press, on which the
-blankets have been properly arranged--you must see this done for
-yourselves--the plate underneath of course; lay the sheet of damp
-paper on the face of the plate and run it through the press once; it
-is well to put a sheet of ordinary thick paper on the top of the damp
-sheet, otherwise the latter will stick to the blankets; raise the
-blankets and take up the first sheet of paper, the print will most
-likely adhere to that, if it does not, take it up carefully by one
-edge, it will come away from the copper, and you will find the print
-on the under side of it.
-
-Japanese and India prints require very careful handling, especially
-the latter. They are usually printed on to a sheet of plate paper by
-dusting it, or the back of the India paper, with flour; this, on
-passing through the press, is made into paste by the dampness of the
-India paper, and they are thus moulded together.
-
-As soon as the prints are taken off the press, put them between sheets
-of blotting paper and allow them to dry for some time, they will come
-out flat; if you neglect this, they will crinkle up very badly, and
-are difficult to get smooth again.
-
-This is the way a copper plate is printed, but you must see it done
-and practise for a long time before you can do it decently.
-
-Colour prints from copper plates may be made in one or more ways. The
-various colours may be put on by applying them where they are wanted
-with stumps, or the plate may be painted by applying the colours with
-brushes. Several plates may be used, just as in lithography or
-coloured block printing, and these coloured plates wiped as I have
-been describing. Many prints, however, are coloured by hand after they
-are printed.
-
-Mezzotints, acquatints, steel engravings, &c., are printed in the same
-way as copper-plates. The rubbing with the canvas and the hand, and
-the tremendous pressure to which the plates are subjected, quickly
-spoil the clearness and sharpness of the lines; therefore if any large
-number of prints are wanted, a coating of steel is put on the face of
-the copper-plate by steel-plating it; this protects the copper, and as
-soon as the steel facing shows signs of wear it may be removed, and a
-new film of steel applied; hence an unlimited edition can be printed
-in time from a copper plate. If it is necessary that the printing
-should be done more rapidly, electrotypes can be made from the
-original copper-plate (_see_ electrotype and stereotype Lecture), and
-several printers can then work on these electrotypes at the same time.
-The electrotypes are rarely equal to the originals.
-
-Such is a brief outline of the method of printing copper plates; but I
-cannot too strongly impress upon you the fact that it is a handicraft
-which, though most interesting, requires long apprenticeship, with a
-master printer, and in one's studio, before good results can be
-obtained.
-
-
-
-
-LECTURE X.
-
-_PHOTOGRAVURE AND PHOTO-LITHOGRAPHY, ETC._
-
-
-These processes or methods of reproduction are the outcome of the
-endeavour to supersede the artist and engraver. They are quite
-mechanical, or should be; in fact the less evidence there is of any
-intervention on the part of the operator or maker of a photographic
-plate, the better it will be for the work which is being reproduced;
-still, if an artist turns his attention to these processes, the finest
-results are obtained, even though he must completely efface himself in
-the work. M. Amand Durand made the best photogravures ever produced
-because he was an artist. No mere photographic or mechanical engraver
-ever approached him.
-
-The theory of photogravure and photo-lithography, in the best work, is
-the same as that of photo-engraving, which is described in a previous
-Lecture. In photogravure a photograph of a drawing is usually made on
-a sensitised copper plate; this is coated with some acid-resisting
-varnish, but when the varnished plate is washed with water or some
-acid, the varnish covering the picture on the plate comes away,
-leaving the picture on the bare copper. This is then bitten in exactly
-the same way as an etching, the success of the plate depending
-entirely on the artistic intelligence of the person who does the
-biting. Or else the photographic print is made on the varnish itself
-just exactly in the same way as for a zinc block; only in this case
-the picture is washed away and not the surrounding portions; the
-biting is then proceeded with.
-
-There are also many other processes of photogravure, while heliotype,
-autotype, Woodbury-type, collotype, are closely allied to it. The word
-type is probably used simply because by none of these methods can the
-plates be used with letterpress. All these processes, however, are
-very complicated, require expensive machinery, are quite outside the
-field of art, most secret, and, except theoretically, of little
-importance to you.
-
-A good photogravure, for example, by Amand Durand or Ch. Dujardin is
-often a most excellent reproduction of a line-drawing or an
-etching--so good, in fact, as to be almost indistinguishable from an
-etching. But to endeavour to palm off pen drawings as etchings, when
-they have been reproduced in some such way, is to act the part of a
-common swindler.
-
-Photo-lithography is exactly the same as photo-zincography--process
-block-making. The drawing is photographed on to transfer paper,
-covered with lithographic ink and transferred to the stone like any
-other lithograph. This is a mechanical process; there are a number of
-ways of getting the drawing on to the stone, and the results are
-described under many names. Collotypes and other varieties of
-photographic prints are made from gelatine or other films; they
-require expensive machines to produce, they are all mechanical
-processes which you could not readily use unless you went into the
-business, and are quite outside your art.
-
-One is being continually shown processes which are going to
-revolutionise engraving and incidentally do away with the artist; this
-has not yet been accomplished. But just as one sees to-day the
-momentary triumph of the photographer--or rather of the person who is
-exploiting the poor photographer--one may remember that chromos have
-not annihilated painting, nor can the photograph ever be anything more
-than a useful aid to illustration.
-
-
-
-
-LECTURE XI.
-
-_MAKING READY FOR THE PRINTING PRESS._
-
-
-Having made your drawing, had it reproduced by one of the methods I
-described, you must now have it printed.
-
-Excepting in the case of very limited fine editions of not more than
-one hundred copies, the original plates or blocks on which the designs
-have been engraved are very seldom used, because if anything should
-happen to the blocks or plates they would have to be done over again.
-So copies of them, called electrotypes and sometimes stereotypes, are
-made. The electrotype of a wood or metal block or plate is produced in
-the same way as an electrotype of any other object, by usually taking a
-wax cast of it, putting the cast in an electrotyping bath, when a shell
-of copper is deposited upon it. As many of these wax casts may be made
-as are wanted, and as many shells are deposited as desired. These
-copper shells are then backed up with wood or metal and are ready to
-print from. They are wonderfully cheaply and quickly turned out, and in
-the case of magazines and books, for which a large circulation is
-expected, are always used; and it is almost, with good work, impossible
-to tell the difference between the electrotype, and the original; from
-a process block or wood engraving, while the original block is
-preserved for making additional electrotypes for future editions. In
-the case of cheap books, or newspapers with illustrations, the _Daily
-Graphic_, for example--the _Chronicle_ was printed almost altogether
-from the original blocks, or electrotypes--the page of type is set up
-with the original blocks in it, and this is stereotyped to print from;
-that is, a papier maché mould is made of the entire page of type and
-illustrations, either by pounding down on to it, with a heavy brush, a
-thick sheet of papier maché till the entire page is moulded into the
-pulpy papier maché, or by covering it with successive sheets of thin
-damp paper until a solid mould or matrix of paper is made on the type;
-this matrix is hardened and placed in a curved steel case, and type
-metal poured into the case upon the paper mould; as soon as the type
-metal has cooled it is taken out, and a perfect cast of the page is
-seen in metal, curved so that it will fit on the cylinder of the
-printing press. If there are no illustrations, it may be printed right
-off, without further preparation; but if the page contains
-illustrations, in order to get the proper amount of colour on the
-blacks, and the delicacy of the greys, little pieces of paper must be
-put over and under the illustrations, on the printing press, to bring
-out their colour, by increasing or lessening the pressure. This is the
-way in which it is done: a man, called the overlay cutter, has several
-proofs of the illustration given him, and he cuts them out so as to
-produce a series of skeleton designs, one containing only the blacks,
-another the blacks and dark greys, the third the blacks, dark and light
-greys, and so on; these he pastes on the top of each other, forming the
-picture in relief, and this relief picture is either placed under the
-block to be printed from, or else on the opposite cylinder under the
-paper on which the picture is to be printed--it must be put on very
-accurately and firmly, for if it slips it will ruin the whole page. All
-this work connected with printing is most interesting, most complicated,
-and most wonderfully performed. In order to understand it thoroughly,
-you must go and work in a printing office; all illustrators should
-learn at least how overlays are made, how to correct them, and how to
-work on blocks or electros, though this is really the duty of the
-engraver; when they are on the printing press, little things may
-happen which may make or mar a whole book, which only the artist can
-detect, and which he should be able to set right. Therefore if you are
-making a beautiful book, you should not only see all the engraver's
-proofs of your drawings, but the printer's proofs as well; all this
-requires much work and more knowledge, but unless you care enough
-about your work to acquire this knowledge, I doubt if you will ever be
-a great success as an illustrator--that is, artistically.
-
-Very much has been said lately about the artist considering the
-limitations of the printing press, the paper, and ink. Really to-day
-with the best engravers, the best printers and paper-makers, there are
-no limits to the possibilities of reproducing and printing drawings.
-The limits are the depth of the publisher's pocket. Almost any drawing
-whatever can be reproduced very well, by some means, provided the
-editor or publisher will pay the price charged for having it
-reproduced, and the engravers and printers have the knowledge of their
-craft to reproduce it. And if the book or magazine will stand the
-expense, it very likely will pay the publisher. But if you are working
-for a magazine, it is not likely that the proprietors can afford
-photogravures, therefore your work must be made so that it will
-reproduce well by wood engraving or process. And the necessity for
-attention to the mechanical requirements of drawing, engraving, and
-printing increase, as the price of the book or paper decreases, until
-when one comes down, financially, to the halfpenny papers, only those
-drawings can be used which will print at the utmost speed, and with
-the least care bestowed upon them, in poor ink and cheap paper. Still,
-there is no reason why the artistic quality also should degenerate;
-there are men at work to-day whose drawings would look just as well in
-the halfpenny evening papers as in a three-guinea book, and these men
-are to be congratulated on their perfect mastery of the cheaper
-methods of reproduction. Therefore try to do good work in your own
-way, and do not bother about anything but whether it will look well on
-the printed page.
-
-
-UNWIN BROTHERS, PRINTERS, LONDON AND CHILWORTH.
-
-
-
-
-Transcriber's Note
-
-Archaic and variant spelling is preserved as printed.
-
-Minor punctuation errors have been repaired.
-
-Hyphenation has been made consistent.
-
-
-
-
-
-End of Project Gutenberg's The Illustration of Books, by Joseph Pennell
-
-*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE ILLUSTRATION OF BOOKS ***
-
-***** This file should be named 51778-0.txt or 51778-0.zip *****
-This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
- http://www.gutenberg.org/5/1/7/7/51778/
-
-Produced by Chris Curnow, Sam W. and the Online Distributed
-Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This file was
-produced from images generously made available by The
-Internet Archive)
-
-Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will
-be renamed.
-
-Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright
-law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works,
-so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United
-States without permission and without paying copyright
-royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part
-of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project
-Gutenberg-tm electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm
-concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark,
-and may not be used if you charge for the eBooks, unless you receive
-specific permission. If you do not charge anything for copies of this
-eBook, complying with the rules is very easy. You may use this eBook
-for nearly any purpose such as creation of derivative works, reports,
-performances and research. They may be modified and printed and given
-away--you may do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks
-not protected by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the
-trademark license, especially commercial redistribution.
-
-START: FULL LICENSE
-
-THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
-PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
-
-To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
-distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
-(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
-Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full
-Project Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at
-www.gutenberg.org/license.
-
-Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project
-Gutenberg-tm electronic works
-
-1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
-electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
-and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
-(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all
-the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or
-destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your
-possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a
-Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound
-by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the
-person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph
-1.E.8.
-
-1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be
-used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
-agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few
-things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
-even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See
-paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project
-Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this
-agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm
-electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below.
-
-1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the
-Foundation" or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection
-of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual
-works in the collection are in the public domain in the United
-States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the
-United States and you are located in the United States, we do not
-claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing,
-displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as
-all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope
-that you will support the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting
-free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm
-works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the
-Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with the work. You can easily
-comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the
-same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg-tm License when
-you share it without charge with others.
-
-1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
-what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are
-in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States,
-check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this
-agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing,
-distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any
-other Project Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no
-representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any
-country outside the United States.
-
-1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
-
-1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other
-immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear
-prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work
-on which the phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the
-phrase "Project Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed,
-performed, viewed, copied or distributed:
-
- This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and
- most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no
- restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it
- under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this
- eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the
- United States, you'll have to check the laws of the country where you
- are located before using this ebook.
-
-1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is
-derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not
-contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the
-copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in
-the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are
-redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase "Project
-Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply
-either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or
-obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg-tm
-trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
-
-1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
-with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
-must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any
-additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms
-will be linked to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works
-posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the
-beginning of this work.
-
-1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
-License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
-work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
-
-1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
-electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
-prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
-active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
-Gutenberg-tm License.
-
-1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
-compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including
-any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access
-to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format
-other than "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official
-version posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site
-(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense
-to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means
-of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original "Plain
-Vanilla ASCII" or other form. Any alternate format must include the
-full Project Gutenberg-tm License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
-
-1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
-performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
-unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
-
-1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
-access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
-provided that
-
-* You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
- the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
- you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed
- to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he has
- agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project
- Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid
- within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are
- legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty
- payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project
- Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in
- Section 4, "Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg
- Literary Archive Foundation."
-
-* You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
- you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
- does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
- License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all
- copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue
- all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg-tm
- works.
-
-* You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of
- any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
- electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of
- receipt of the work.
-
-* You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
- distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
-
-1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project
-Gutenberg-tm electronic work or group of works on different terms than
-are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing
-from both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and The
-Project Gutenberg Trademark LLC, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm
-trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
-
-1.F.
-
-1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
-effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
-works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project
-Gutenberg-tm collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm
-electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may
-contain "Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate
-or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other
-intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or
-other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or
-cannot be read by your equipment.
-
-1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
-of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
-Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
-Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
-Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
-liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
-fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
-LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
-PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
-TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
-LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
-INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
-DAMAGE.
-
-1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
-defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
-receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
-written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you
-received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium
-with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you
-with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in
-lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person
-or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second
-opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If
-the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing
-without further opportunities to fix the problem.
-
-1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
-in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO
-OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
-LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
-
-1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
-warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of
-damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement
-violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the
-agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or
-limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or
-unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the
-remaining provisions.
-
-1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
-trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
-providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in
-accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the
-production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm
-electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses,
-including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of
-the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this
-or any Project Gutenberg-tm work, (b) alteration, modification, or
-additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any
-Defect you cause.
-
-Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
-
-Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
-electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of
-computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It
-exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations
-from people in all walks of life.
-
-Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
-assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
-goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
-remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project
-Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
-and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future
-generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary
-Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see
-Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at
-www.gutenberg.org
-
-
-
-Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
-
-The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
-501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
-state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
-Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
-number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary
-Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by
-U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
-
-The Foundation's principal office is in Fairbanks, Alaska, with the
-mailing address: PO Box 750175, Fairbanks, AK 99775, but its
-volunteers and employees are scattered throughout numerous
-locations. Its business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, Salt
-Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up to
-date contact information can be found at the Foundation's web site and
-official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact
-
-For additional contact information:
-
- Dr. Gregory B. Newby
- Chief Executive and Director
- gbnewby@pglaf.org
-
-Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
-Literary Archive Foundation
-
-Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
-spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
-increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
-freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
-array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations
-($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
-status with the IRS.
-
-The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
-charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
-States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
-considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
-with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations
-where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND
-DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular
-state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate
-
-While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
-have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
-against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
-approach us with offers to donate.
-
-International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
-any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
-outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
-
-Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
-methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other
-ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To
-donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate
-
-Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works.
-
-Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project
-Gutenberg-tm concept of a library of electronic works that could be
-freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and
-distributed Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of
-volunteer support.
-
-Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
-editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in
-the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not
-necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper
-edition.
-
-Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search
-facility: www.gutenberg.org
-
-This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
-including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
-Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
-subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
-
diff --git a/old/51778-0.zip b/old/51778-0.zip
deleted file mode 100644
index 3e7166d..0000000
--- a/old/51778-0.zip
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/51778-h.zip b/old/51778-h.zip
deleted file mode 100644
index 5eb9d38..0000000
--- a/old/51778-h.zip
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/51778-h/51778-h.htm b/old/51778-h/51778-h.htm
deleted file mode 100644
index b12e8f8..0000000
--- a/old/51778-h/51778-h.htm
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,4624 +0,0 @@
-<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN"
- "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd">
-
-<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xml:lang="en" lang="en">
- <head>
- <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html;charset=iso-8859-1" />
- <title>
- The Project Gutenberg eBook of The Illustration of Books, by Joseph Pennell.
- </title>
- <link rel="coverpage" href="images/cover.jpg" />
- <style type="text/css">
- p {margin-top: .75em; text-align: justify; margin-bottom: .75em;}
-
- h1 {text-align: center; clear: both; font-weight: normal; margin-top: 3em;}
- h2 {text-align: center; clear: both; font-weight: normal; margin-top: 2em;}
-
- div.centered table {margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;}
-
- body {margin-left: 10%; margin-right: 10%;}
-
- a {text-decoration: none;}
-
- img {border: none;}
-
- .hidden {display: none;}
-
- .pagenum { /* uncomment the next line for invisible page numbers */
- /* visibility: hidden; */
- position: absolute;
- left: 92%;
- font-style: normal;
- font-variant: normal;
- font-weight: normal;
- font-size: smaller;
- text-align: right;
- } /* page numbers */
-
- .bbox {border: 2px black solid; padding: 1em; margin-top: 3em; margin-bottom: 3em;}
- .covernote {visibility: hidden; display: none; border: 2px black solid; padding: 1em; margin-top: 3em; margin-bottom: 3em;}
-
- .center {text-align: center;}
- .smcap {font-variant: small-caps;}
-
- .dropcap {float: left; width: auto; padding-right: 3px; font-size: 350%; line-height: 83%;}
- /* Plain dropcaps */
- .dropcapit {float: left; width: auto; padding-right: 6px; font-size: 350%; line-height: 80%;}
- /* Plain dropcaps, italic */
-
- .figcenter {margin: auto; text-align: center; padding-top: 2em; padding-bottom: 2em;}
-
- .footnote {margin-left: 10%; margin-right: 10%; font-size: 0.9em;}
- .footnote .label {text-align: left; padding-right: .3em;}
- .fnanchor {vertical-align: .2em; font-size: .8em; text-decoration: none;}
-
- .poemcenter {text-align: center;}
- .poem {margin-left:3%; margin-right:3%; text-align: left; display: inline-block;}
- .poem br {display: none;}
- .poem .stanza {margin: 1em 0em 1em 0em;}
- .poem div.i0 {display: block; margin-left: 0em; padding-left: 3em; text-indent: -3em;}
-
- .tdl {text-align: left; vertical-align: bottom; padding-left: 1em; text-indent: -1em;} /* left align cell hanging indent */
- .tdr {text-align: right; vertical-align: bottom;} /* right align cell */
- .tdc {text-align: center; vertical-align: top; padding-top: 1.5em;} /* center align cell top padding */
-
- .signed {text-align: right; margin-right: 2em;} /* author name aligned right */
-
- .titlep {margin-top: 2em;}
- .tpcontent {text-align: center; margin-top: 3em; margin-bottom: 3em;}
- .lrgfont01 {font-size: 150%; letter-spacing: .06em;}
- .lrgfont02 {font-size: 150%; letter-spacing: .12em;}
- .lspace01 {letter-spacing: .12em;}
- .lspace02 {letter-spacing: .08em;}
- .lspace03 {letter-spacing: .155em;}
- .lspace04 {letter-spacing: .145em;}
- .lspace05 {letter-spacing: .23em;}
- .tinyfont {font-size: 60%;}
- .tinyfont01 {font-size: 60%; letter-spacing: .07em;}
- .tinyfont02 {font-size: 60%; letter-spacing: .06em;}
- .tinyfont03 {font-size: 60%; letter-spacing: .2em;}
- .tinyfont04 {font-size: 60%; letter-spacing: .1em;}
- .copyright {text-align: center; margin-top: 3em; margin-bottom: 3em; font-size: 75%;}
- .reptitle {text-align: center; margin-top: 2em; margin-bottom: 2em; font-size: 200%;}
- .note {padding-top: 4em; padding-bottom: 4em;}
- .lecture {font-size: 85%; font-style: italic;}
- .printcredit {text-align: center; font-size: 75%; margin-top: 3em; margin-bottom: 3em;}
-
-@media print, handheld
-{
- body {margin-left: 2%; margin-right: 2%;}
- h2.nobreak {page-break-before: avoid;}
- .titlep {page-break-before: always; page-break-after: always;}
- h2, .reptitle, .note, .copyright, .bbox {page-break-before: always;}
- .pagenum {visibility: hidden;}
-}
-
-@media handheld
-{
- .covernote {visibility: visible; display: block; page-break-after: always;}
- .figcenter {padding-top: .5em;}
- .poem {margin-left: 5%; margin-right: 5%; text-align: left; display: block;}
- h1, .titlep {margin-top: 0em;}
- .tpcontent {text-align: center; margin-top: .5em; margin-bottom: .5em;}
-}
-
- </style>
- </head>
-<body>
-
-
-<pre>
-
-The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Illustration of Books, by Joseph Pennell
-
-This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most
-other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions
-whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of
-the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at
-www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you'll have
-to check the laws of the country where you are located before using this ebook.
-
-Title: The Illustration of Books
- A Manual for the Use of Students, Notes for a Course of
- Lectures at the Slade School, University College
-
-Author: Joseph Pennell
-
-Release Date: April 17, 2016 [EBook #51778]
-
-Language: English
-
-Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1
-
-*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE ILLUSTRATION OF BOOKS ***
-
-
-
-
-Produced by Chris Curnow, Sam W. and the Online Distributed
-Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This file was
-produced from images generously made available by The
-Internet Archive)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-</pre>
-
-
-
-
-<div class="covernote">
-<p><b>Transcriber&rsquo;s Note</b></p>
-
-<p>The cover image was created by the transcriber for the convenience of the reader,
-and it is placed in the public domain.</p>
-</div>
-
-
-
-<h1>THE ILLUSTRATION OF BOOKS</h1>
-
-
-<div class="figcenter" style="width: 112px;">
-<img src="images/logo.png" width="112" height="186"
-alt="Publisher's logo" />
-</div>
-
-
-
-<div class="titlep">
-<p class="tpcontent"><span class="lrgfont01">THE ILLUSTRATION</span><br />
-<span class="lrgfont02">OF BOOKS</span> <span class="lspace01">A MANUAL</span><br />
-<span class="lspace02">FOR THE USE OF STUDENTS,</span><br />
-<span class="lspace03">NOTES FOR A COURSE OF</span><br />
-<span class="lspace04">LECTURES AT THE SLADE</span><br />
-SCHOOL, UNIVERSITY COLLEGE<br />
-
-<span class="tinyfont">BY</span><br />
-
-<span class="lspace05">JOSEPH PENNELL</span><br />
-
-<span class="tinyfont01">LECTURER ON ILLUSTRATION AT</span><br />
-<span class="tinyfont02">THE SLADE SCHOOL, UNIVERSITY</span><br />
-<span class="tinyfont03">COLLEGE, AUTHOR OF &ldquo;PEN</span><br />
-<span class="tinyfont">DRAWING AND PEN DRAUGHTSMEN,&rdquo;</span><br />
-<span class="tinyfont04">&ldquo;MODERN ILLUSTRATION,&rdquo; ETC</span></p>
-
-
-<p class="tpcontent">NEW YORK: THE CENTURY CO<br />
-LONDON: T FISHER UNWIN</p>
-</div>
-
-
-<p class="copyright"><i>All rights reserved.</i></p>
-
-
-
-<div class="chapter">
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_v" id="Page_v">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>v]</a></span></p>
-
-<h2><a name="contents" id="contents"></a>CONTENTS.</h2>
-</div>
-
-
-<div class="centered">
-<table border="0" summary="Table of contents">
- <tr>
- <td class="tdc" colspan="2">LECTURE I.</td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td class="tdl">&nbsp;</td>
- <td class="tdr"><small>PAGE</small></td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td class="tdl">WHAT IS ILLUSTRATION?</td>
- <td class="tdr"><a href="#chap01">1</a></td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td class="tdc" colspan="2">LECTURE II.</td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td class="tdl">THE EQUIPMENT OF THE ILLUSTRATOR</td>
- <td class="tdr"><a href="#chap02">14</a></td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td class="tdc" colspan="2">LECTURE III.</td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td class="tdl">METHODS OF DRAWING FOR REPRODUCTION IN LINE</td>
- <td class="tdr"><a href="#chap03">33</a></td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td class="tdc" colspan="2">LECTURE IV.</td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td class="tdl">THE REPRODUCTION OF LINE DRAWINGS</td>
- <td class="tdr"><a href="#chap04">65</a></td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td class="tdc" colspan="2">LECTURE V.</td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td class="tdl">THE MAKING OF WASH DRAWINGS AND THEIR REPRODUCTION BY MECHANICAL PROCESS</td>
- <td class="tdr"><a href="#chap05">80</a></td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td class="tdc" colspan="2">LECTURE VI.</td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td class="tdl">REPRODUCTION OF DRAWINGS BY WOOD ENGRAVING</td>
- <td class="tdr"><a href="#chap06">93</a></td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td class="tdc" colspan="2"><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_vi" id="Page_vi">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>vi]</a></span>LECTURE VII.</td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td class="tdl">LITHOGRAPHY</td>
- <td class="tdr"><a href="#chap07">112</a></td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td class="tdc" colspan="2">LECTURE VIII.</td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td class="tdl">ETCHING</td>
- <td class="tdr"><a href="#chap08">123</a></td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td class="tdc" colspan="2">LECTURE IX.</td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td class="tdl">THE PRINTING OF ETCHINGS</td>
- <td class="tdr"><a href="#chap09">144</a></td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td class="tdc" colspan="2">LECTURE X.</td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td class="tdl">PHOTOGRAVURE AND PHOTO-LITHOGRAPHY, ETC.</td>
- <td class="tdr"><a href="#chap10">155</a></td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td class="tdc" colspan="2">LECTURE XI.</td>
- </tr>
- <tr>
- <td class="tdl">MAKING READY FOR THE PRINTING PRESS</td>
- <td class="tdr"><a href="#chap11">160</a></td>
- </tr>
-</table>
-</div>
-
-
-<div class="note">
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_vii" id="Page_vii"><!-- unnumbered in original --></a></span></p>
-
-<p><i>Some of these Lectures were printed in
-the &ldquo;Art Journal,&rdquo; and they are republished
-by permission of the Editor.</i></p>
-</div>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_viii" id="Page_viii"><!-- unnumbered blank in original --></a></span></p>
-
-
-
-<div class="chapter">
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_ix" id="Page_ix">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>ix]</a></span></p>
-
-<h2><a name="preface" id="preface"></a>PREFACE.</h2>
-</div>
-
-
-<p><i><span class="dropcapit">T</span>HESE lectures were delivered in the
-Slade School, University College, at
-the request and suggestion of Professor F.
-Brown, and, I believe, were the first, or
-among the first, serious attempts in this
-country to point out all the various methods
-of making and reproducing drawings for
-book and newspaper illustration.</i></p>
-
-<p><i>Since they were first delivered, now some
-three winters ago, courses of lectures on
-illustration, and classes for instruction in
-drawing and engraving have been started
-in almost all art schools.</i></p>
-
-<p><i>It seemed to me, therefore, that a small
-manual on the subject might be useful.</i></p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_x" id="Page_x">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>x]</a></span>
-<i>There is no attempt in this book to define
-Art, or even to tell the student how to
-draw; that he learns in his ordinary
-school work. Still less is there any endeavour
-to dictate, or even suggest, any especial
-style, or manner of handling, or technique.</i></p>
-
-<p><i>But illustration is, up to a certain point,
-a mechanical craft, which must be learned,
-and can be learned, by any one. And
-ignorance of the requirements and absolute
-necessities are evident all around us.</i></p>
-
-<p><i>The book, therefore, might rather be described
-as a series of tips or hints&mdash;to
-put it on as low a plane as possible&mdash;the
-result of practical experience, which should
-enable the student to make his drawings so
-that they will produce a good effect on the
-printed page; but, first of all, he must be
-able to make the drawing well. No one
-can teach him that; but he can be taught
-what materials he should use, where he can
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_xi" id="Page_xi">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>xi]</a></span>
-get them, and how he should employ them.
-That is all I have tried to do.</i></p>
-
-<p><i>As I have said in this book repeatedly,
-processes are discovered and perfected
-almost daily. Since these lectures were
-last given, the method of etching zinc and
-copper half-tone blocks has been entirely
-revolutionised. Now, there is no inking
-up of plates; the photograph on the metal
-serves as a protecting and acid-resisting
-ground, and the biting is done as simply
-as in ordinary etching; though, of course,
-it is the lines or dots which are left in
-relief.</i></p>
-
-<p><i>Possibly before the book is out, even
-greater improvements and developments may
-be made.</i></p>
-
-<p><i>Nor have I attempted to describe all the
-tricks, dodges, and clever schemes employed
-in newspaper offices for making blocks from
-photographs, or for the rapid reproduction
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_xii" id="Page_xii">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>xii]</a></span>
-of sketches, such as drawing on lithographic
-transfer paper, making photographic enlargements
-on fugitive prints. All are
-most useful and valuable in their way, but
-not exactly what one would tell a student
-to do. If he becomes an illustrator he will
-learn these things fast enough.</i></p>
-
-<p><i>As the book is passing through the press
-Mr. W. Lewis Fraser, the art manager of
-&ldquo;The Century&rdquo; magazine, writes me that
-he thinks it &ldquo;a good practical book, likely
-to be of much use to the young illustrator,
-and save the art editor many a pang and
-many a sorrow.&rdquo; I hope so, and it is with
-this hope that the book is published.</i></p>
-
-<p class="signed">JOSEPH PENNELL.</p>
-
-<p><span class="smcap">London</span>, <i>Oct., 1895</i>.</p>
-
-
-
-<div class="chapter">
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_1" id="Page_1">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>1]</a></span></p>
-
-<p class="reptitle">THE ILLUSTRATION OF BOOKS.</p>
-
-
-
-
-<h2 class="nobreak"><a name="chap01" id="chap01"></a>LECTURE I.<br />
-<br />
-<span class="lecture">WHAT IS ILLUSTRATION?</span></h2>
-</div>
-
-
-<p><span class="dropcap">T</span>HE craving for pictures, that is, for
-illustrations, is as old as the world.
-The cave-dweller felt it when he scratched
-on the walls of his house, or carved the
-handle of his battle-axe; one there was
-&ldquo;who stayed by the tents with the women,
-and traced strange devices with a burnt
-stick upon the ground.&rdquo; Others painted
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_2" id="Page_2">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>2]</a></span>
-themselves blue, and were beautiful; and
-these were the first illustrators.</p>
-
-<p>The Egyptians were the most prolific,
-and their works may be found, monuments
-more durable than brass, not alone in their
-places, but scattered to all the corners of
-the earth.</p>
-
-<p>From the Egyptians and the Assyrians
-we may skip, offending but the arch&aelig;ologist
-and the pedant, to the illuminators who
-threw their light on the Dark Ages. They
-changed their methods from carving to
-tracing, and their mediums from stone and
-papyrus to parchment and vellum.</p>
-
-<p>But always these illustrations were single
-works of art, they were not reproduced,
-and only duplicated by copying by hand.</p>
-
-<p>Beautiful as are the manuscripts, they
-play but a small and unimportant part in the
-history of illustration, when compared with
-the block books that follow them; though
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_3" id="Page_3">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>3]</a></span>
-block printing is but a natural evolution
-from the stamp on the bricks of the Egyptian,
-or the painting on the vases of the Etruscan.</p>
-
-<p>The block books, more often loose sheets,
-were printed from designs, picture and text,
-cut on the wood, in one piece, sometimes
-possibly engraved in metal. These blocks,
-being inked, and having sheets of paper
-placed on their inked surfaces, and the paper
-being rubbed, gave off an impression; as
-many blocks having to be cut as there were
-pages, and as many impressions having to be
-taken from each block as there were copies
-desired. The first of these illustrated
-blocks is the St. Christopher, 1423, though
-playing-cards, produced in the same way,
-were known much earlier.</p>
-
-<p>It is only, however, with the invention
-of printing with movable types, practised by
-the Chinese centuries before we ever thought
-of it, that illustration, in its modern sense,
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_4" id="Page_4">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>4]</a></span>
-may be said to have been created; though
-printing with movable type is but the cutting
-up into separate letters of the pages of the
-block books. As soon as the artist was
-able to make his design upon a block of
-wood, have that engraved, and set up in
-the press with movable type, and print from
-it, a new art was discovered.</p>
-
-<p>From the day of Gutenberg and Sch&oelig;ffer,
-illustration has, in the main, never changed;
-new methods have been employed, new processes
-for making the blocks have been
-perfected, but an illustration still continues
-to be a design on a wood block or metal
-plate, so cut, engraved, or etched as to produce
-a printing surface from which impressions
-may be taken, either in connection
-with type, when we call it letterpress or relief
-printing, or separate from the type, when it
-usually becomes intaglio or plate printing.</p>
-
-<p>These methods have undergone, and
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_5" id="Page_5">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>5]</a></span>
-still are undergoing, incessant modifications,
-developments, and improvements; and anyone
-who wishes to take up illustration as
-a profession or a study, must learn the
-rudiments of the science, as well as master
-the great principles of art, if he wishes to
-succeed.</p>
-
-<p>To-day, the methods of making the design
-are many, but the methods of reproducing
-it are virtually endless; still one must try
-to learn something of the most important,
-and the more one understands the requirements
-of drawing for engraving and printing,
-the better will be the results obtained.</p>
-
-<p>In the fifteenth century one had but to
-design the picture on the side of a plank,
-write in the text in reverse, cut everything
-else away, wet the block thoroughly, ink
-the face of it, lay damp paper over it, and
-rub or press the back of the sheet of paper
-till the ink came off on it, producing a print.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_6" id="Page_6">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>6]</a></span>
-To-day one must understand drawing in
-all sorts of mediums, know something of
-the effect of photographing a drawing on
-to the wood block or metal plate, take at
-least an intelligent interest in engraving on
-wood and metal, understand process and
-lithography, and be prepared to struggle
-with that terrible monster, the modern steam-press,
-and its slave, the modern printer. To
-do this intelligently requires, not only a
-training in Art, but in the arts and sciences
-of engraving, reproduction, printing; and
-it is to these arts and sciences that I propose
-to call your attention.</p>
-
-<p>An illustration&mdash;using the term in its
-artistic sense&mdash;is a design intended to give
-an artist&rsquo;s idea of an incident, episode,
-or topographical site, or it may be but a
-mere diagram referred to by a writer;
-and an illustrator is one who makes pictures
-or illustrations which illustrate or
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_7" id="Page_7">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>7]</a></span>
-explain his own text, or that of another
-writer.</p>
-
-<p>An illustration really is a work of art,
-or rather it should be, which is explanatory;
-but, as a matter of fact, so too is all graphic
-art, explanatory of some story, sentiment,
-emotion, effect, or fact; and it would be
-very difficult indeed to point out when art
-is not illustrative.</p>
-
-<p>As the word is used to-day, however, an
-illustration is a design made for the purpose
-of publication in book or magazine or paper.
-The fashion of making such designs to
-accompany lettering or type is, as I have
-shown, as old as the art of writing. The
-art of illustration, or rather the existence
-of illustration as a separate craft, and of
-illustrators as a distinct body of craftsmen,
-is virtually the growth of this century, more
-properly of the last sixty years since the
-invention of illustrated journalism.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_8" id="Page_8">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>8]</a></span>
-Until the other day illustration had no
-place among the Fine Arts, and it has been
-said that, to win renown, an illustrator must
-achieve it in some other branch of art.</p>
-
-<p>A few great artists of the past have made
-illustrations which will be prized for ever,
-and to-day these men are spoken of as
-illustrators; with D&uuml;rer and Holbein it was
-but one of the many forms of art in which
-they excelled, but they were not altogether
-given up to it.</p>
-
-<p>To-day, however, illustration is the most
-living and vital of the Fine Arts, and among
-its followers are found the most able and
-eminent of contemporary artists.</p>
-
-<p>It cannot, however, be said that this prominence
-which has been so suddenly thrust
-upon illustration is altogether due to its
-increase in artistic excellence; there are a
-number of other reasons.</p>
-
-<p>Illustration has indeed reached technically,
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_9" id="Page_9">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>9]</a></span>
-on the part of artist, engraver, and printer,
-such a point of perfection, that it has at
-length forced critics and amateurs to give
-it the attention it has so long demanded.</p>
-
-<p>More important reasons are the developments
-in reproduction and printing, started,
-and to a great extent carried on, merely
-to lessen the cost of production, but capable
-of giving better and truer results in the
-hands of intelligent craftsmen, than anything
-previously known.</p>
-
-<p>Still, cheapness in reproduction by process,
-cheapness in the cost of printing, has
-enabled numbers of absolutely ignorant
-people (ignorant, that is, of art), but possessed
-of, they think, fine commercial instincts,
-to start illustrated papers and publish
-illustrated books. The result has been that
-an army of out-of-works in other fields of
-art, of immature or even utterly untrained
-students, escaping from the hard labour and
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_10" id="Page_10">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>10]</a></span>
-drudgery of an art school, ignorant even of
-the fact that great illustrators have always
-studied and worked before they have found
-a chance to start, have rushed into illustration.
-They are led blindly by the advice of
-the blind, they find even manuals on the
-subject written authoritatively by people who
-are either not artists, engravers, or printers,
-or, if they do pretend to practise any of these
-arts and crafts, are unknown and unheard of
-among the artists with whom they would rank
-themselves; and more wonderful still, the
-pupils of these blind leaders of the blind find
-publishers and printers ignorant enough to
-employ them; but not so ignorant as to pay
-more than the wage of an inferior servant
-for the worthless work supplied them.</p>
-
-<p>There are many of these papers, magazines,
-and books being published to-day&mdash;eminent
-authors even contribute to their
-pages; but the illustrations they contain are
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_11" id="Page_11">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>11]</a></span>
-more primitive in their depth of ignorance
-than the work of the cave-dwellers, and
-would be equally valuable to future ages if it
-were not that they were mainly made up of
-an unintelligent cribbing, and stealing from
-photographs and other men&rsquo;s work.</p>
-
-<p>Therefore, as a mass, instead of advancing,
-illustration is sinking lower and lower, owing
-to the action of those who pretend to be
-its patrons; at the present moment we
-find ourselves in a critical situation, good
-work crowded out by mediocrity&mdash;because
-mediocrity is cheaper&mdash;real artists lost
-sight of amid the crowd of squirming,
-struggling, advertising hacks. Any spark
-of originality is stamped out if possible.
-The mere attempt to say anything in one&rsquo;s
-own fashion is a crime, and on all sides the
-prayer for the extinction of the artist is
-heard; after him will go the process man
-as the commercial wood engraver has
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_12" id="Page_12">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>12]</a></span>
-vanished, and then&mdash;well, things will take
-a new start, good work will be done, and
-we may as well prepare for the time coming
-soon, when cheapness and nastiness, having
-struggled to the bitter end, will kill each
-other for want of something better.</p>
-
-<p>Still, to-day, as good work is being done
-as ever there was; only cheapness has to
-shriek so loud, and advertise so large, to be
-seen at all, that people are deafened by the
-shrieking, and at times the best is but seen
-through a glass, darkly. Nevertheless, good
-art will as surely live as bad will perish.
-Let us then endeavour not only to learn
-what good work is, but how to do it. In
-the near future this will be absolutely
-necessary. When one sees the greatest
-artists in England drawing for penny
-papers, one realises that illustration is
-only apparently in a bad way, that really
-we are entering upon a second renaissance,
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_13" id="Page_13">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>13]</a></span>
-that this is but the dark moment before
-the dawn.</p>
-
-<p>As a preliminary, and also a final, word
-to you, I would say, you must draw, draw,
-draw first, last, and all the time, and until
-you can draw, and draw well, you cannot
-illustrate.</p>
-
-<p>The study, therefore, of the equipment
-of the illustrator should be our aim&mdash;what
-he must do before he can make good illustrations,
-then, how he is to make them.</p>
-
-
-
-<div class="chapter">
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_14" id="Page_14">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>14]</a></span></p>
-
-<h2><a name="chap02" id="chap02"></a>LECTURE II.<br />
-<br />
-<span class="lecture">THE EQUIPMENT OF THE ILLUSTRATOR.</span></h2>
-</div>
-
-
-<p><span class="dropcap">T</span>HREE special qualifications are absolutely
-indispensable to the artist who
-desires to become an illustrator.</p>
-
-<p>First, in order to make the least important
-illustration, the student must have a sound
-training in drawing, and if he has worked
-in colour so much the better, for in the near
-future colour work will play a very important
-part, even in the least costly form
-of books and papers.</p>
-
-<p>Second, the student must thoroughly
-understand the use of various mediums, oil
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_15" id="Page_15">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>15]</a></span>
-(in monochrome at least), water colour, wash
-and body colour, pen and ink, chalk, etching,
-lithography, and he must have ability to
-express himself by almost all these methods.
-A knowledge, too, of the appearance the
-drawing will present after it has been engraved
-on wood or metal, processed, etched,
-or lithographed is necessary, because the
-illustrator will be held responsible for the
-results on the printed page; even though, as
-is usually the case, the fault is that of the
-engraver or printer, the public certainly will
-blame the artist alone. Therefore the editor
-or publisher will not employ him. The engraver
-will blame him if only to save his
-own business reputation. The printer will
-take away in every case many valuable
-qualities which the drawing possessed; but
-for the incompetency or inability of engraver
-and printer, the artist will be held accountable,
-and he must therefore understand
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_16" id="Page_16">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>16]</a></span>
-engraving and printing well enough to
-place the blame where it belongs, if not
-on his own shoulders.</p>
-
-<p>To be able, then, to obtain good printed
-results, requires a knowledge of the reproductive
-arts, on the part of the illustrator,
-in theory at least, almost equal to the practical
-skill demanded in drawing.</p>
-
-<p>Third, but most important of all, the
-ability to discover the vital or characteristic
-motive of an author&rsquo;s work, and so set it
-forth that the public may see it too. And
-the power to do this well is without doubt
-the real test of an illustrator.</p>
-
-<p>Nothing is more difficult. The artist must
-please the author, therefore he should if
-possible know the writer personally; at least
-he must be in sympathy with, and interested
-in his work, else a difference arises at once;
-jealousy between author and artist, nearly
-always the fault of the author, who usually
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_17" id="Page_17">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>17]</a></span>
-resents the presence of the artist at all, is
-the cause of half the failures in illustration.
-No artist would think of dictating to an
-author the fashion in which the latter should
-write his story, but every author, and not
-a few editors, try to tell their own artist how
-it shall be illustrated. To a certain extent
-this is right, and it would be altogether
-right, if only the author and editor knew
-anything of art; but not infrequently they
-do not, and the less they know the more
-they dictate.</p>
-
-<p>It may be safely said that not once in a
-hundred times is the author satisfied with
-his illustrations, especially if they are made
-to decorate a story. And even the designs
-intended to illustrate a descriptive article
-seldom please the writer, simply because the
-author has no comprehension of the limitations
-of graphic art.</p>
-
-<p>Still, with descriptive articles, the case is
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_18" id="Page_18">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>18]</a></span>
-somewhat different. If the illustrator knows
-the author, he may undertake the journey, if
-to a foreign land, for example, with him, and
-a most delightful piece of collaboration may
-be the result. Or the author having visited
-the spot&mdash;sometimes he writes about it without
-having done so&mdash;may make out a list
-of subjects, and the artist may pick and
-choose from them, going to the place
-described to do so, with more or less satisfactory
-results. It is in this way that most
-of the better known magazines obtain their
-illustrated descriptive articles, but even by
-this method the artist and author usually
-disagree as to what should be drawn, the
-matter being looked at from two entirely
-different points of view. Or the artist may
-be asked to work up into drawings, from
-photographs, views of a place, or portraits
-of people never seen by him; some illustrators
-are very successful at this, work
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_19" id="Page_19">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>19]</a></span>
-which in most men&rsquo;s hands would be but
-the veriest drudgery and hack work, becoming
-interesting, attractive, and truly
-artistic.</p>
-
-<p>But in most cases such drawings, even
-by the most skilful men, lack the go and life
-obtained when the work is done direct from
-nature, or at least without the photograph;
-and every true artist prefers nature to any
-photograph. There is nothing in the world
-more difficult to work from. One is
-confused by endless unimportant, unselected
-details; the point of view is never that
-which one would have selected, and the
-result, save in the rarest instances, is dubbed
-photographic even by the artless.</p>
-
-<p>The most awful misfortune that may
-occur to an illustrator is to be compelled
-to use the photographs or sketches made
-by an author; here almost certain disaster
-awaits the artist. The author who cannot
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_20" id="Page_20">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>20]</a></span>
-draw but will sketch is terrible; the author
-who can photograph is impossible. Both, they
-are sure, could make the illustrations if they
-but had the time; and the artist who is
-compelled to illustrate them could write
-the story or do the description, he knows,
-if he but took the trouble. At least, that
-is the view they take of each other. The
-result is almost certain failure.</p>
-
-<p>Such people should contribute solely to
-the journals of actuality, where neither art
-nor literature find an abiding place, and
-the photograph, the amateur, and the personal
-paragraph are supreme.</p>
-
-<p>Despite all these things, and many more,
-people struggle to become illustrators.</p>
-
-<p>Another qualification for the illustrator
-is education; no ignorant person may
-become a decent illustrator. He need not
-possess an university degree; few do.
-But he must be able to understand a
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_21" id="Page_21">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>21]</a></span>
-vital or dramatic or pictorial point, and to
-arrive at this understanding may necessitate
-much study of literature at home
-and the visiting of many lands.</p>
-
-<p>How can one illustrate a history of
-Napoleon, for example, without reading
-everything possible about his life that the
-author read, and without visiting the
-various countries in which his life was
-passed; in short, the conscientious illustrator
-goes through exactly the same
-process as the author, when collecting his
-materials. With this difference; the author
-is, in most cases, the final judge of his
-own work, and of his artist&rsquo;s efforts too.
-It is amazing that, considering that an
-illustrator has to submit to having his
-work judged by editors, rejected by
-authors, spoiled by engraving, injured by
-process, and ruined by printing&mdash;and all
-this may happen to good as well as bad
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_22" id="Page_22">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>22]</a></span>
-work&mdash;armies of young people are rushing
-into an over-crowded profession, and every
-art school, by teaching illustration, is encouraging
-them to do so.</p>
-
-<p>Seeing, then, that such is the case, my
-object is to endeavour to give you a
-start in the right way if possible, at least
-in the way that, up to the present, the
-best work has been done.</p>
-
-<p>That is, briefly, by drawing well, by
-working carefully, by expressing ideas
-plainly, and these desired results can only
-be obtained by those who regard illustration
-quite as seriously as any other branch
-of the Fine Arts; who know the good work
-that has been done in the past, and working
-on the right traditions, adapt their
-methods to the requirements of the present.</p>
-
-<p>There are many more points to be noted,
-not least of which is that an illustrator
-must learn to keep his temper; from the
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_23" id="Page_23">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>23]</a></span>
-first drawing he submits, until he takes
-to painting in despair, his work will almost
-surely be misunderstood, his motives disbelieved.
-If he works in the style affected
-by his paper, that is, the style which the
-editor considers appeals to his subscribers&mdash;for
-papers are published for gain, not love&mdash;he
-will be asked by the critic why he
-does so. If he dares to be original, to
-follow his own inclinations, he will be
-told to efface himself and work like the
-rest. If he sketches he will be accused
-of shirking his work. If he elaborates
-he will be told he is ruining the proprietor.</p>
-
-<p>His only consolation is that he, personally,
-seldom sees the editor, he prepares
-himself for the ordeal, and as the
-editor has to encounter a constant succession
-of irate, contrite, emphatic, and even
-furious artists, his life cannot be an
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_24" id="Page_24">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>24]</a></span>
-altogether happy one. Still he flourishes, and
-so does the illustrator.</p>
-
-<p>But there are compensations. One may
-be asked to illustrate the works of a
-deceased author, one may treat the volume
-almost as one likes, and discuss the result
-with the editor. In this case the artist will
-almost certainly do his best. If he has the
-true illustrative spirit, he will study the period,
-the country, the manners, the costume; and,
-if let alone, to produce the work in his own
-way and at his leisure, he may create a
-masterpiece. This, however, depends entirely
-on the artist. It is in this way that the great
-illustrated works of the century have come
-into existence, without hurry, without worry,
-and, after all, the pleasure of work has been
-almost the only reward the artist has gained&mdash;and
-that seems to be enough to attract
-crowds&mdash;but I doubt if the business side of
-illustration means much to the student.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_25" id="Page_25">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>25]</a></span>
-Better still, the artist may make a series
-of drawings, and then get a writer&mdash;an
-artist in words&mdash;one of those people who
-talk of impressionism in prose, or impasto
-in poetry, to turn out so many yards of
-copy. With what a grace he does so, and
-with what glee the artist pounces on his
-lines! If it were not for the ever-present
-editor the author&rsquo;s lot would be almost as
-bad as the illustrator&rsquo;s.</p>
-
-<p>Best condition of all under which work
-may be produced is when the illustrator is
-his own author, when he writes his own
-story or does his own description; this
-requires that one shall be doubly gifted.
-Much may be learned by practice, but to
-be really great in this has as yet scarce
-been granted. But a few very talented
-artist-authors exist.</p>
-
-<p>Equally good are those magazines that
-publish illustrations which are independent
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_26" id="Page_26">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>26]</a></span>
-works of art, of equal importance with the
-text.</p>
-
-<p>Equally pleasant, too, is working for the
-weekly illustrated press&mdash;how long this form
-of publication will last is doubtful&mdash;making
-drawings which will be printed of a large
-size and show really the ability of the artist.
-It is pleasant, too, when the editor is an artist
-or man of sympathetic intelligence.</p>
-
-<p>Another very important matter is the
-recognising of the fact that illustration at
-its best is equal in artistic rank with any
-other form of artistic expression; and that
-in every country save England illustrators
-rank with any other artists. Here one is
-forced to take to paint to gain admittance
-to the Royal Academy, though most of the
-distinguished members of that body won
-their reputations, and live on them, not by
-colour, but by the despised trade of illustrating.
-Critics&mdash;even the best of them&mdash;will
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_27" id="Page_27">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>27]</a></span>
-tell you that an illustrator is just a little
-lower than a painter. It is false if the art
-of the one is as good in quality as that of
-the other; else Rembrandt&rsquo;s etchings are
-inferior to his paintings, which is absurd.</p>
-
-<p>But to-day many illustrators, in fact the
-mass, do not take themselves seriously.
-They squabble and haggle, they hurry and
-push, they are as much shopkeepers as your
-out-of-work painter. Others must have
-their stuff in every paper. Others&rsquo; portraits
-and eventless bourgeois lives appear in every
-magazine, especially if the portrait is done
-for nothing and a few drawings are thrown
-in. Others crib the superficial qualities of
-the popular one of the moment, whether his
-game is eccentricity, mysticism, or primitiveness,
-three excellent dodges for hiding
-incapacity or want of training.</p>
-
-<p>Not that there are no good men who do
-find their means of expression among the
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_28" id="Page_28">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>28]</a></span>
-primitives or who are really mystic, or truly
-grotesque, but for every one of these there
-is an army of frauds.</p>
-
-<p>But all the while good work is being done.
-You may not see the real artist&rsquo;s name in
-letters a foot long on every hoarding, or his
-productions in every book that comes out.
-But once in a while he does an article, or
-even a drawing and then the mystics, the
-hacks, the primitives, and even some few
-of the public, buy it and treasure it up.</p>
-
-<p>Therefore be serious, be earnest; and if
-you cannot be&mdash;if you think illustration but a
-stepping-stone to something better&mdash;leave it
-alone and tackle the something better. You
-may never succeed in that; you will certainly
-fail in illustration.</p>
-
-<p>There is still another point, the financial
-one. Here illustration approaches architecture.
-Ruskin said somewhere, probably
-by accident, for it is so true, &ldquo;Never give
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_29" id="Page_29">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>29]</a></span>
-your drawings away; tear them up or keep
-them till some one wants to buy them.&rdquo;
-At the present time the profession is so
-crowded at the bottom that some shopkeeping
-editors have profited by this to
-reduce their prices almost to nothing&mdash;literally,
-by threatening and sweating, obtaining
-the work of mere students and people
-who are without money or brains, though
-they may be possessed of artistic ability,
-for next to nothing. In the case of painters
-they have said, &ldquo;Send us a photo or sketch
-of your picture, and we will put it in; and
-think of the advertisement.&rdquo;</p>
-
-<p>What you who want to be illustrators
-must think of is that the painters who give
-their work to these people are fools. Would
-a writer give his story for nothing, or a poet
-his sonnet? And when these editors say
-they can get such an one&rsquo;s drawing for so
-much less, tell them to get it, they will come
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_30" id="Page_30">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>30]</a></span>
-after you on their knees later if you have
-anything in you, or their papers do not come
-to grief in the meantime.</p>
-
-<p>Of course there can be no hard-and-fast
-rule about remuneration, but the labourer is
-worthy of what he can get. And it has only
-been within the last few years that the clever
-dodge of swindling the public by bad photos
-and worse art, of sweating artists by employing
-hacks and students has been practised,
-for the benefit of two people, grasping
-proprietors and still more grasping editors.</p>
-
-<p>In connection with this matter, let me
-read you an extract from a letter recently
-received by me from the greatest living
-illustrator (it is therefore unnecessary to
-mention his name), and read at one of the
-meetings of the Society of Illustrators:&mdash;</p>
-
-<p>&ldquo;It has for too long been the case that
-the unsuccessful practitioner of other arts
-has turned to illustration of the baser sort as
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_31" id="Page_31">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>31]</a></span>
-a last chance of earning a living. I dare
-say he has a right to a living, but in these
-days of cheap and nasty illustrated journals,
-the low standard of work he brings, as a
-rule, to a branch of the artistic calling
-always considered by me a dignified and
-important branch, I do not believe in
-recognising or encouraging; and it certainly
-seems to me that a certain distinction
-should be made between men who take not
-the slightest artistic interest in their work
-and those who conscientiously endeavour to
-do it well and honestly.</p>
-
-<p>&ldquo;I have seen the abnormal growth and
-prosperity of cheap and nasty illustration,
-to my great regret. I suppose that so long
-as there is a large market for it, men will
-be found to supply it, and evidently this is
-the sort of thing finding favour to-day.</p>
-
-<p>&ldquo;The standard set up by the &lsquo;Cornhill&rsquo;
-and &lsquo;Once a Week,&rsquo; and by Menzel and
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_32" id="Page_32">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>32]</a></span>
-Meissonier abroad, seems to be out of key
-with the present taste. It must be that
-ignorance of good work is responsible&rdquo;&mdash;ignorance,
-I may add, on the part of the
-artist and editor&mdash;in their case intentional
-or deplorable; in the case of the public it
-is but the blind leading the blind.</p>
-
-<p>Therefore, finally, try to do good work,
-and when you have done it demand to be
-well paid for it. If you have not the moral
-or financial backbone for this, go and chop
-wood&mdash;or paint.</p>
-
-
-
-<div class="chapter">
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_33" id="Page_33">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>33]</a></span></p>
-
-<h2><a name="chap03" id="chap03"></a>LECTURE III.<br />
-<br />
-<span class="lecture">METHODS OF DRAWING FOR REPRODUCTION
-IN LINE.</span></h2>
-</div>
-
-
-<p><span class="dropcap">T</span>HERE is no doubt that to-day the
-most popular method of designing
-the decoration of a book (I use the word
-book, but I would refer to magazines and
-papers as well) is by means of line work.
-By the use of what materials these lines are
-to be made; how they are to be placed upon
-paper or metal that they may reproduce and
-print best; and the way in which that reproduction
-and printing is done, will be the
-subject of this and subsequent lectures.</p>
-
-<p>The line has always been employed, not
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_34" id="Page_34">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>34]</a></span>
-only by artists, but by the artless, to express
-form; the only difference being that the
-artist uses a vital line full of meaning, the
-artless a meaningless line without vitality.
-But often the work of the two approaches
-so closely that at times it can scarcely be
-distinguished; however, that is a critical,
-and not a technical, matter.</p>
-
-<p>I do not propose to give you a history of
-the methods employed to obtain lines, in
-fact, a history of drawing. There are many
-such books, and as for drawing you study
-that every day, in the life and antique, and
-I hope outside as well. But it is to line work
-and its reproduction in the present, that I
-wish to call your attention.</p>
-
-<p>The most generally adopted method of
-making a line drawing for illustration to-day
-is with a pen and ink, upon white
-paper. There are but four tools, and a
-surface to work on required. The tools
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_35" id="Page_35">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>35]</a></span>
-are simple and cheap enough, the ability
-to use them rightly and well is rare enough,
-even though every book is decorated and all
-newspapers are to be illustrated in the near
-future.</p>
-
-<p>First, as to the pens: there is, as you
-know, an endless variety of them, all the
-best. Some are made specially for the
-artist, and of these the most generally
-used is Gillott&rsquo;s 659 (all colourmen keep
-them), a barrel pen, which fits a special
-handle; when one has mastered this pen,
-unsympathetic, hard and scratchy at first,
-and each pen, by the way, has to be broken
-in, one finds that the most amazing variety of
-line can be obtained with it, from the most
-delicate to the boldest. The beginner thinks
-because it is a small tool that only small work
-can be done with it; experience and practice
-will prove to him that it is a most sensitive
-implement, and he will learn to take care of
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_36" id="Page_36">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>36]</a></span>
-his pens, keeping them on the holder in a
-box which they just fit, for these pens improve
-with age, getting better and better
-until they are almost like living things, and
-then they break.</p>
-
-<p>From this most delicate and sensitive of
-pens I would call your attention to the
-hardest and most unsympathetic, the glass
-pen, or stylus; this is a useful tool, but
-while the Gillott is to be used in work demanding
-freedom of touch and consequent
-variety of line, the glass pen is only to be
-used&mdash;unless you like it&mdash;when lines of
-uniform thickness are wanted. It carries
-a large quantity of ink, and, as lines can be
-made in any direction with it, it is more like
-an etching needle than anything else I know
-of; and if these pens were really well made in
-metal and not of glass, and of different sizes
-and would give lines really varying in
-width, they would be much used; as it is
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_37" id="Page_37">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>37]</a></span>
-they are very unreliable, easily broken, and
-expensive. I find that they are liable to
-tear up the paper, or refuse to work in an
-annoying fashion. It has been pointed out
-that they are most useful for tracing, and
-also that if they clog up they may be easily
-cleaned by dipping in water and wiping off
-with a dry rag. I may say that they should
-be thoroughly wiped, and in fact all pens
-should, after they are cleaned, or the ink is
-changed, as you may not only spoil your
-pen, but your ink as well, by dipping your
-pen without cleaning, either in water or
-another sort of ink, as one ink may contain
-some chemical matter which absolutely
-ruins another. Some rubber should be
-placed in the bottom of your inkstand, for
-if the glass pen drops heavily it will be
-broken; but not paper, unless you wish to
-spend all your time wiping pulp off your
-pen. The best of these pens I have found
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_38" id="Page_38">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>38]</a></span>
-are those sold by Roberson, 99, Long Acre.
-Between these two extremes, of flexibility
-in the Gillott, and firmness in the stylus,
-are to be found all sorts and conditions
-of pens. And I may say that you may
-never like, and you need never use, any
-special kind, but instead your favourite
-writing pen; if you like that best, it is the
-tool for you, use it. There are, however,
-some other sorts of pens to which I may
-call your attention. If only some fountain-pen
-maker had the sense to invent a pen
-for artists, he would make his fortune. But
-fountain-pens at present are unreliable in
-action and unsuitable for use with drawing
-inks, so they are out of the question altogether
-for us.</p>
-
-<p>A very good tool is the quill pen. Much
-variety can be obtained with it, especially
-in broad dragged work. I use technical
-terms because you understand them, I
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_39" id="Page_39">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>39]</a></span>
-hope, and it is only the technical side of
-illustration I propose to touch. With the
-back of this pen you can get rich and
-broken effects, especially when it is half
-dry. The quill, the stylus, and the reed,
-were the tools for pen-drawing used by
-the old men. You can buy quill pens
-anywhere. Reed pens you had better
-make for yourselves; go to a reed bed in
-the early summer, cut off the top of the
-stalk, strip off the outer covering, and cut
-the inner canes into sections between the
-joints, cut your pen and finish it at once,
-or rather a lot of them, for when the reed
-is dry it is liable to split and is not half so
-flexible.</p>
-
-<p>Pen work with reed pens really should
-only be done when they are fresh; but at
-all times they glide easily over the paper,
-though any pen will do this after you
-have mastered it. Reed pens also
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_40" id="Page_40">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>40]</a></span>
-make a broad fat line and hold lots of
-colour.</p>
-
-<p>Another pen which is useful sometimes is
-Perry&rsquo;s Auto-Stylo, or marking pen, from
-Perry&rsquo;s, Holborn Viaduct; lines half an inch
-broad or as fine as a hair can be made with
-it, and I have at times used it as a brush;
-it is a most amusing instrument.</p>
-
-<p>Brandauer&rsquo;s round pointed pens are used
-by some. But the pen you should use is the
-pen you can use; that is, the pen with which
-you can get the most variety of line. Or
-you may use half a dozen, from the finest
-Gillott to the biggest reed. It is not the
-pen, but the person who uses it. Sometimes
-it is not a bad thing to remember this.</p>
-
-<p>Many artists are now taking up the use
-of the brush; most probably it was used by
-the old men, certainly the men of the last
-generation employed it, as it was much
-easier to work on the wood block with a
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_41" id="Page_41">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>41]</a></span>
-brush than a pen. And we know that the
-Japanese pen is a brush. The advantages
-are flexibility of line, amount of colour it
-will hold, freedom from scratchiness, and
-absolute freedom of movement in every
-direction&mdash;the greatest advantage of all&mdash;the
-line itself is fuller and fatter, more
-pleasing. The drawbacks, well, there
-scarcely are any, save that to use either
-brush or pen well is about as difficult as
-to play the violin; that is all.</p>
-
-<p>The commonest brush for line work is
-that used by lithographers, a sable rigger
-which they cut to a fine point, removing the
-outside hairs; but almost any good pointed
-brush will do. Very good indeed are the
-genuine Japanese brushes, the small thin
-ones are the best&mdash;in black handles&mdash;you
-can pick these up sometimes at the Japanese
-dealers, but I imagine any artist&rsquo;s colourman
-would send to Japan for them if there
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_42" id="Page_42">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>42]</a></span>
-was a sufficient demand; I have got them in
-quantities for a penny each.</p>
-
-<p>There are various mechanical tint tools
-like air brushes in use; they are of little
-importance to the artist, and if you want a
-dotted tint you can get it by dipping a toothbrush
-in ink and rubbing the inked hairs
-with a match stick, when the ink will be
-splattered in dots and blots all over the
-paper. You may lay a piece of paper on
-the parts you wish to keep white, and paint
-or scratch out spots that are too dark, or you
-may impress your inked thumb or pieces of
-inked silk on the paper, or indulge in any
-trick of this sort that amuses you and gives
-the desired result.</p>
-
-<p>Ink is probably the most important material
-employed in pen-drawing. It must be
-good, that is, it must be black&mdash;it should not
-shine&mdash;it must never settle, it must flow
-easily, dry quickly, and never clog the pen.
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_43" id="Page_43">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>43]</a></span>
-There are many varieties of good ink, but
-the only ink I know of to-day, which gives
-me exactly what I want and is obtainable of
-the same quality all over the world, all over
-Europe at any rate&mdash;and this is an enormous
-advantage&mdash;is Bourgeois&rsquo; Encre de Chine
-Liquide. During several years it has never
-varied, and that is more than I can say of
-any other. It is indelible, a desirable
-quality in ordinary use. The only bad
-thing about it is the vile, ill-balanced bottle
-and the rotten cork, which always breaks and
-often gets you into a mess. The best bottle
-I have ever seen is that in which Higgins&rsquo;
-American drawing ink comes.</p>
-
-<p>This is not a talk on inks, but a hint as to
-what I have found the most satisfactory and
-reliable&mdash;if you do not like this one, every
-colourman makes an ink or sells some
-one else&rsquo;s; try it. Among the best are
-Higgins&rsquo;, Winsor and Newton&rsquo;s,
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_44" id="Page_44">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>44]</a></span>
-Newman&rsquo;s, Rowney&rsquo;s, Reeves&rsquo;, Stevens&rsquo; ebony
-stain.</p>
-
-<p>Freshly-ground Indian ink is the best of
-all, but to grind up your ink is too much
-trouble, too tedious and too unreliable to
-be worth the bother it entails. Indian ink,
-under certain conditions, shines and glitters,
-and this is not pleasant, and hinders photography.
-Lamp black and ivory black are
-quite dead and free from shine, but they are
-not fixed colours. They may be easily fixed
-with gall or gum.</p>
-
-<p>Writing inks usually, if not always, have
-blue in them; therefore they will not photograph,
-they run about, blot, and generally
-misbehave. Sometimes one gets good black
-writing-ink; when you do get it, use it.
-But Indian or Chinese ink is best, and
-as I know of no better preparation at
-present, I commend Bourgeois&rsquo; Encre de
-Chine Liquide; it comes in the tall bottle
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_45" id="Page_45">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>45]</a></span>
-with the diagonal black and yellow dragon
-on the label. Coloured inks, save blue, may
-be used, but unless the illustration is to be
-printed in that colour the result is almost
-always disappointing; delicate washes of
-brown, for instance, becoming staring solid
-blacks.</p>
-
-<p>In sketching out of doors with ink, a
-method I most strongly recommend, pour
-your ink, or rather enough of it, into
-an exciseman&rsquo;s ink-bottle, one of those
-unspillable affairs which you can cork up&mdash;though,
-save to keep the dust out of them,
-there is no occasion to do so&mdash;and attach
-it by a sort of watch-guard to your buttonhole,
-putting the bottle in your pocket.
-Messrs. Newman, 24, Soho Square, have
-fixed up some of these bottles for me, and
-they will, I have no doubt, supply them.</p>
-
-<p>The general way with artists is to put
-their uncorked ink-bottle in their waistcoat
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_46" id="Page_46">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>46]</a></span>
-pocket; if they should happen to lean over,
-on straightening up the ink is found upon
-their trousers or frocks, or sketch-block&mdash;in
-the male a result most conducive to
-strong language, especially if the trousers are
-spoiled; the drawing doesn&rsquo;t so much matter.</p>
-
-<p>Also provide yourself with a hardish lead
-pencil H., or, better, a blue one, as the
-blue doesn&rsquo;t photograph, but it&rsquo;s hard to
-get off the paper, and don&rsquo;t look well; also
-some lithographic crayon or Wolff&rsquo;s carbon
-pencils; a good rubber, pure rubber or
-bread for the pencil, an ink rubber or
-eraser for the ink; some Chinese white
-and gum for patching up things; and for
-use in the house, an old razor to scratch
-out, and out of doors a folding eraser,
-such as Mr. Percy Young, of Gower
-Street, supplies: get the folding ones, as
-the others are not only less convenient but
-rather dangerous to carry.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_47" id="Page_47">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>47]</a></span>
-Lastly, the paper: the photo-engraver
-will tell you Bristol board. Certainly, a
-simple open line drawing in pure black
-upon pure white smooth paper, very little
-reduced, should give a truer result than
-anything else. But what it does really
-is to give engraver and printer less
-trouble, and that is what most of them
-want; in the majority of cases it is best
-to aid them, otherwise your work is spoiled.
-Therefore, if you like Bristol board, use it,
-and use it whether you like it or no, if you
-are doing work for ordinary printing. But
-if your illustration is to be well engraved
-and well printed, use what paper you like.
-But to get satisfactory results from rough
-paper requires much experience, and you
-had better arrive at that experience by
-doing simple things, in a fashion which
-will engrave well; go to printing offices
-and engravers&rsquo; shops, find out what is
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_48" id="Page_48">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>48]</a></span>
-necessary, try to work in harmony with the
-engraver and printer, and they will do
-their best for you: most of them care about
-their work, and are genuinely sorry if they
-cannot make yours look well, so work with
-them, and they will work with you.</p>
-
-<p>As to the Bristol board, get the best; if
-the drawing is large and has to be rolled
-up, the thin, if not the thicker quality; it is
-known as so many sheets, two, four, six
-sheets the heaviest. You must get the
-best quality, otherwise there is a risk of
-bad spongy places in it, which may
-almost ruin the drawing, at any rate its
-appearance, and necessitate patching up
-which is delaying and annoying. Bristol
-boards, too, may always be made up into
-books or blocks. Some boards are now
-mounted so that they can be stripped off
-the mount when the drawing is finished,
-among them are Turnbull&rsquo;s Art Tablets;
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_49" id="Page_49">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>49]</a></span>
-while the best surface of all, which is like
-marble or ivory to work on, a surface
-which may be rubbed or scratched without
-harm, is the old mounted thin Whatman
-or Bank Note paper prepared by Messrs.
-Roberson and Newman. These thin papers
-are mounted on heavy boards and kept
-under hydraulic pressure for weeks, until
-the whole becomes a solid mass. This
-mounted Whatman, when well made, is
-the best paper in the world; it is also
-the most expensive. Thin foreign correspondence
-paper may also be used, putting
-it over the sketch like tracing paper, and
-when the drawing is finished mounting it
-on card board; tracing paper may also be
-mounted. One scheme not much in vogue
-yet is to draw upon black paper with
-Chinese white, making the drawing in white
-lines instead of black. Any sort of writing
-paper, or all varieties of rough or smooth
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_50" id="Page_50">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>50]</a></span>
-Whatman are useful. Of course in drawing
-on rough paper you are bound to get a rough
-broken result in printing; however, if you
-know what you are after, no one will object
-but the engraver. In fact any sort of
-white paper may be used for pen and ink
-work; only, the smooth gives the most
-certain results. There are also many
-grained papers which give a tint; that is,
-a mechanical tint is printed on the paper,
-lights are scratched in it, blacks are put
-in with a pen or brush, another tint in
-pencil or chalk is added, and many tricks
-may be played, one usually only a little
-less satisfactory than the other. These
-papers are made by Gillott, of Paris, and
-Anger and Goeschl, of Vienna, and generally
-supplied by colourmen; they are
-called Gillott or scratch papers.</p>
-
-<p>There are also various clay or chalk
-surfaced papers which, after being drawn
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_51" id="Page_51">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>51]</a></span>
-upon, may be scratched to get light in the
-design. The results are, however, rarely
-satisfactory. In fact, it is best to use a
-good handmade white paper; you will be
-surer of your result, and that is what you
-are working for.</p>
-
-<p>Having given you a list of the necessary
-materials, I will try to tell you how you
-should use them. I shall not try to compel
-you to make short lines or long lines,
-black blots or white lines: work in your
-own fashion, only that must be good, and
-capable of being engraved and printed.
-I shall not tell you how to draw, but
-how to draw so that your work may reproduce
-and print best. You may commence
-your drawing in either one of two
-ways, by making a pencil sketch on your
-sheet of paper which is to be sent to the
-engraver, preferably in blue pencil which
-does not photograph, and in as few lines
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_52" id="Page_52">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>52]</a></span>
-as possible; or by commencing straight away
-at your final work, in ink; if it is a drawing
-from nature, I do not see why you should
-not do this, for it will teach you care in
-selecting your lines and putting them
-down. And as you have an ink eraser in
-metal and rubber you should be able to
-remove those which are wrong.</p>
-
-<p>But if your design is more in the nature
-of a composition with elaborate figures, or
-figures in action, it will be almost impossible
-to do this. True, most interesting
-sketches may be made, and should be made
-and must be made direct from nature.
-But your final design will in nearly every
-case have to be built up from these.
-Therefore, unless you can &ldquo;see the whole
-thing in your head&rdquo; before you put it on
-paper, so clearly that you only want a
-model to keep you right, I think you had
-better make sketch after sketch, and then
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_53" id="Page_53">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>53]</a></span>
-transfer the best to the sheet on which it
-is to be completed by putting transfer paper
-under the sketch and tracing paper over
-it. Probably you will pencil on the final
-drawing, but do as little as you can, for
-the camera, when the drawing comes to be
-photographed, pays just as much attention
-to smudges, finger marks, pencil lines, and
-meaningless accidents as it does to those
-portions which are brim full of meaning.
-By neglecting these matters all artists give
-engravers much trouble, and unless the
-engraver is an artist too he not infrequently
-bestows great pains on the reproduction
-of an accidental line, even though
-in order to do so he ruins the entire drawing.
-And again, in all cheap work your
-drawing is placed with a number of others
-and no special attention is paid to it,
-and it reproduces somehow, or don&rsquo;t, which
-is much the same thing. But in case
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_54" id="Page_54">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>54]</a></span>
-of failure you will be blamed by the
-public.</p>
-
-<p>The first thing to remember in putting
-your drawing on the paper is the space it
-is to fill; if it is to be a full page, it must
-be made the size of that page or twice as
-large; at any rate it must have some
-definite relation to it. In the case of half
-a page, it is only necessary that the top
-or bottom of the drawing should fit across
-the printed matter; still, the drawing should
-not be made so high that it will not fit in,
-or so narrow as to be ineffective, but if
-you will look at any book or magazine you
-will see what I mean.</p>
-
-<p>Again, for cheap rapid work as little
-cross-hatching as possible should be
-indulged in, for all cross-hatched lozenges
-become smaller lozenges in reduction, and
-the smaller they are the easier it is for
-them to fill up and clog with ink. Draw
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_55" id="Page_55">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>55]</a></span>
-your shadows with parallel lines whenever
-you can without being mechanical; they
-engrave and print well.</p>
-
-<p>After several years&rsquo; experience I am
-quite unable to say how much or how
-little a drawing should be reduced, for
-there is no reason why it should be drawn
-the same size it is to be engraved, save
-that the nearer it is the same size, the
-nearer the result should be to the original;
-if the reduction is to be great, it is easier
-to make the design larger and have it
-mechanically reduced. The excessive reduction
-of a drawing tends to make the
-lines run together into a black mass sometimes,
-and the enlargement of a drawing&mdash;this,
-too, may be done&mdash;makes the lines
-at times look crude and clumsy. But it
-is impossible to foretell results in any two
-cases. Only there is one matter: a good
-drawing in line will, with good engraving
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_56" id="Page_56">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>56]</a></span>
-and printing, look well, whether the artist
-knew anything of process or not. But
-there are some things to be observed, if
-certain results are wished for.</p>
-
-<p>In simple cheap work the ink should
-be uniformly black, for the engraved block
-will be put with type, and inked with the
-same amount and strength of colour all
-over; therefore, in order to get variety,
-distance, effect, you must use lines of
-different widths, placed at varying distances
-apart, not of different degrees of colour.
-In theory at least, then, the foreground
-should be drawn with a firm bold line,
-the middle distance with a medium-sized
-line, the lines themselves closer together,
-and the extreme distance with a thin line.
-But there is no rule, only get variety in
-your line and this will produce variety and
-interest in the engraved result.</p>
-
-<p>If you make your drawings much larger
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_57" id="Page_57">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>57]</a></span>
-than they are to be reproduced, you will
-often be greatly surprised at the change
-in their appearance. Greys will, by filling
-up, become darker, and lights lighter owing
-to the concentration around them of masses
-of colour; that is, blacks become blacker,
-and whites whiter in reproduction. But do
-remember that though the drawings by Boyd
-Houghton, Millais, F. Walker and Pinwell
-were made the size you see them, on the
-wood, in the books of twenty-five years
-ago, the drawings made to-day by Abbey,
-for example, are four or five times as large
-as the published engravings, and are not,
-in the originals, filled with that microscopic
-work which appears in the reproductions.
-But do not make crude lines under the
-impression that they will ever be anything
-but crude. Try to make a beautiful drawing,
-a beautiful line&mdash;unless you can do this
-you will never get a beautiful reproduction;
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_58" id="Page_58">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>58]</a></span>
-and once you have learned to draw, study
-the best books and the best magazines,
-always remembering that drawings to-day
-are made much larger, as a rule, than you
-see them on the printed page.</p>
-
-<p>Again, in reproduction you will often
-find that some parts of the same drawing
-change more than others; some places, for
-example, become too weak, others too
-strong. I cannot explain this, but you will
-find that it does happen. At times it
-may be because the photograph is bad,
-or the etching is rotten, but even with
-good photography and etching the final
-result is often disappointing.</p>
-
-<p>In pen work you may run the gamut
-from solid blacks to the most delicate
-grey line. Do not try to always, but
-select a colour scheme which is restrained
-and appropriate to every drawing.</p>
-
-<p>Solid black will reproduce best because
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_59" id="Page_59">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>59]</a></span>
-it is a solid mass, excepting in cheap rapid
-printing, when solid blacks either get too
-much or too little ink. A number of
-black lines close together will reproduce
-almost equally well, because in engraving
-and printing these lines support the paper
-and do not take up too much ink. A
-single thin line, on the contrary, always
-thickens in the engraving, and often prints
-badly because in the printing press the
-ink and paper bear down too heavily
-upon it and it receives too much ink and
-thickens up.</p>
-
-<p>I have recommended you to use only
-black ink and white paper; before you
-have worked much you will try experiments,
-I am sure, in greying ink, putting
-water with it, and leaving pencil marks,
-or adding lines with lithographic chalk, or
-crayon; but you will find out the moment
-the drawing is printed that everything
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_60" id="Page_60">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>60]</a></span>
-comes quite black, and if you have made
-your distance in broad grey lines it will
-possibly ruin your whole scheme. Greys
-may be obtained by engraving the blocks
-by hand, rouletting, or a number of other
-ways which I shall explain. Line drawings
-may also be made altogether in
-pencil, on rough paper, in chalk or
-crayon, reinforced, if necessary, with a blot
-of ink, or a wash, or a line with a pen here
-and there; but for line work with these
-materials you must employ a grained paper
-in order to get a proper mechanical direct
-reproduction of the work. Bristol boards
-must not be used. Sometimes these combinations
-of pen and pencil work are excellent;
-but they must harmonise, otherwise
-the result is unpleasant.</p>
-
-<p>Some idea of the effect your drawing
-will present when engraved may be
-obtained by the use of a diminishing
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_61" id="Page_61">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>61]</a></span>
-glass; and, <i>vice vers&acirc;</i>, you might study
-some of the engravings in the books and
-magazines around you with a magnifying
-glass.</p>
-
-<p>Corrections in line drawings with pen
-should be made either with an ink eraser,
-a razor, the razor knife, or by painting
-over the place with Chinese white, or, if
-it be large, by pasting down a bit of
-paper on it. This is the most usual way;
-if the paper is thin and the edges well
-joined, it is the best. Or you may cut a
-hole from the back and let in a bit of
-paper, paring down the edges, or scraping
-them down; but be careful about the
-edges, because they make a nasty line
-when the drawing is photographed. In
-pencil, crayon, or charcoal work, remove
-imperfections in the ordinary way with a bit
-of rubber. You will not, of course, lose your
-head and elaborate a pen drawing, any more
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_62" id="Page_62">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>62]</a></span>
-than you would a chalk or charcoal drawing
-or etching. You will select your lines
-with the utmost care, put them down with
-the greatest intelligence, and the more
-care and intelligence you exercise the
-better will be your illustrations; however,
-this is what you are trying to do every
-time you make a drawing in line from
-life or the antique, and I will not bore
-you by repeating what you hear every
-day in your ordinary school work, nor
-will I do more than remind you how
-careful you must be in your composition,
-in your arrangement of lines, in your
-placing of blacks, in making up your
-picture; only exercise the judgment necessary
-to compose any other work of art.</p>
-
-<p>Your drawings should be works of
-art; be proud of them; but also regard
-them as a means to an end, and, as I
-have said, for cheap and rapid printing
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_63" id="Page_63">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>63]</a></span>
-draw on smooth white paper with good
-black ink, and do not use big solid
-blacks, or single thin lines. Keep your
-work as open as possible and do not
-have it reduced. That is, draw as near
-the size it is to appear (if you can find
-that out) as possible. For the best engraving
-and printing, draw as you like.
-Anything to-day can be photographed and
-engraved; the great difficulty is in the
-printing. Remember that if you do not
-put distinction and character into your
-work, the engraver and printer cannot.
-They will take much away in any case.</p>
-
-<p>As you are working for an editor, you
-will have to please him. Do so if you
-can without hurting your work and your
-own standard of right and wrong.</p>
-
-<p>But always work in your own way, if
-that is at all possible for reproduction
-and printing, if not, you will have to
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_64" id="Page_64">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>64]</a></span>
-change your methods. For you are
-working for a definite purpose, illustration;
-therefore your work must engrave.</p>
-
-<p>If you wish to succeed you must see
-all the illustration you can, you must talk
-to editors and illustrators, and you must
-go down into the printing office and the
-engraver&rsquo;s shop.</p>
-
-<p>You must learn your trade, for if you
-have not passed through the drudgery of
-the apprentice, you will never become a
-master of your craft.</p>
-
-
-
-<div class="chapter">
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_65" id="Page_65">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>65]</a></span></p>
-
-<h2><a name="chap04" id="chap04"></a>LECTURE IV.<br />
-<br />
-<span class="lecture">THE REPRODUCTION OF LINE DRAWINGS.</span></h2>
-</div>
-
-
-<p><span class="dropcap">A</span>S illustrators, or would-be illustrators,
-your work is not at an end with
-the completion of your drawings; you
-must look after them while they are
-being engraved, and you should see them
-through the press. From the time you
-are given a commission to illustrate a
-subject until the printed result is in the
-hands of the public, the work in all its
-stages should be the object of your untiring
-attention. It is true that at present
-the fact that you take an interest in
-your profession will be counted against
-you in some quarters, for should you
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_66" id="Page_66">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>66]</a></span>
-happen&mdash;as is not unlikely&mdash;to know more
-of drawing, engraving, and printing than
-the art editor, the engraver, or the
-printer, your suggestions will not be received
-with enthusiasm, nor your criticisms
-with delight. Suggestions mean
-changes, and criticism means objections
-to the routine way of doing things. Then
-you may not feel a great interest in the
-scientific side of your work, yet chemistry
-plays an important part in illustration.
-The mechanical reproduction of drawings
-is based entirely on chemical action, and
-you must know something of this matter if
-you would get good results.</p>
-
-<p>But let us consider the whole subject.
-Drawings in line were originally, in the
-fifteenth century, reproduced by wood
-cutting;<a name="FNanchor_1_1" id="FNanchor_1_1"></a><a href="#Footnote_1_1" class="fnanchor">[1]</a> that is to say, the drawing was
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_67" id="Page_67">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>67]</a></span>
-made in line with pen, point, or brush on
-the side of a plank, and all those portions
-of the block which were not drawn upon
-were cut away with knives and chisels,
-the design only remaining in relief; this
-relief was dabbed over with ink or paint,
-and a piece of damp paper was laid on it.
-The back of this paper was rubbed, burnished,
-or pressed on to the inked surface
-of the block and took up the ink from
-it; on removing the paper an impression
-in reverse of the inked block was found
-on the under side of it. And this was the
-method, with improvements, employed in
-printing from type, for three hundred
-years.</p>
-
-<div class="footnote">
-<p><a name="Footnote_1_1" id="Footnote_1_1"></a><span class="label"><a href="#FNanchor_1_1">[1]</a></span>
-Of course I shall refer to metal engraving in
-another lecture.</p>
-</div>
-
-<p>About the beginning of this century the
-design began to be drawn upon the end
-of a block of box-wood&mdash;a cross section of
-it&mdash;and the parts left blank were cut
-away with gravers, tools used by
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_68" id="Page_68">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>68]</a></span>
-engravers in metal, or else lines were engraved
-on the surface of the block, which printed as
-whites in the blacks; the grain of the cross
-section of box-wood was firmer and finer,
-and with the gravers more delicate lines
-could be engraved and more true results
-obtained; and at the same time continual
-improvements were being made in the
-presses, steam being substituted for hand
-power, and the manufacture of paper and
-ink totally revolutionised.</p>
-
-<p>These methods were employed until
-about 1865, when, instead of the drawings
-being made by the artists on the block
-of wood, they began to be drawn on paper
-in line, and then photographed on to the
-wood. This was a great improvement,
-because the artist could now make his
-designs of any size he wished and have
-them photographed down to the required
-dimensions and reversed for him: the mere
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_69" id="Page_69">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>69]</a></span>
-reversing in many cases was both tedious
-and uninteresting.<a name="FNanchor_2_2" id="FNanchor_2_2"></a><a href="#Footnote_2_2" class="fnanchor">[2]</a></p>
-
-<div class="footnote">
-<p><a name="Footnote_2_2" id="Footnote_2_2"></a><span class="label"><a href="#FNanchor_2_2">[2]</a></span>
-If the drawing is a portrait of a place, it must
-be reversed on the wood or metal in order that the
-print may appear as the original does in nature.</p>
-</div>
-
-<p>The final step which brings us to the
-present, though not by any means, I am
-sure, to the end of the chapter, is the
-superseding of the woodcutter or wood engraver
-in line, by the mechanical engraver
-in metal or gelatine.</p>
-
-<p>Now you may do your drawings, if you
-wish, in line with a pencil or brush upon
-the prepared piece of box-wood, and the
-engraver may cut away all those portions
-of the wood-block which you have not
-touched, remembering always that though
-you draw freely he must engrave laboriously,
-and the more free your drawing
-becomes, the more complicated must his
-engraving be. So when you make a
-sketchy drawing on wood, none but the
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_70" id="Page_70">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>70]</a></span>
-most accomplished engraver can retain
-that look of freedom and sketchiness; if
-the lines of the drawing become really
-complicated, in cross hatching, for example,
-he cannot follow them, he must suggest
-them. Hence, unless the engraver really
-loves this sort of work, it is but drudgery,
-and the better the reproduction the more
-skilled labour wasted.</p>
-
-<p>Now photography has changed all this.
-A photograph of the drawing, of the required
-size it is to appear on the printed
-page, is taken. The drawing may be enlarged
-or reduced to this size, and the
-negative thus obtained is placed in reverse
-in a photographic printing frame, in contact
-with a sensitised zinc plate, coated
-with a thin film either of albumen or
-bitumen, or it may be that a gelatine
-film is the material used for printing on.
-In the first method the albumen coated
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_71" id="Page_71">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>71]</a></span>
-piece of zinc is removed from the printing
-frame as soon as the photographic print has
-been made; it is then coated with ink
-and placed in water, the albumen and ink
-upon it adhere to those parts of the zinc
-which have been exposed to light, and
-may be washed off the other parts, thus
-leaving the picture on the zinc in ink.
-By the bitumen process the picture is
-printed in the same way: the plate is
-placed in a bath of turpentine, the picture
-appears on the zinc, and the bitumen
-dissolves off the other parts.</p>
-
-<p>If these two prints are now covered with
-powdered rosin, gum, and ink, they may be
-placed in a bath of nitric acid and water, and
-the exposed parts bitten or etched away.
-This is a most interesting and delicate process,
-and success depends in good work more
-upon the skill and artistic intelligence of
-the etcher than the chemicals used. The
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_72" id="Page_72">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>72]</a></span>
-object is to remove all the whites as in wood
-engraving, half remove the greys, and leave
-the blacks. After the zinc has been bitten
-a short time it is taken out of the bath again,
-covered with gum, resin and ink to protect it
-from the acid, heated, when the protecting
-mass melts and runs down the sides of the
-bitten lines and protects them also; this process
-is continued until the block is sufficiently
-etched. When the exposed parts are all
-eaten away the picture appears in relief.
-This occupies a few hours, maybe but an
-hour or less. When completed, the zinc
-picture is mounted upon a piece of wood, to
-make it the same height as the type, placed
-in a printing press and copies are made of
-it, or from electrotypes or stereotypes, at
-the rate of from twenty to 20,000 an hour.
-This is, I hope, an intelligible outline of the
-photo-engraving process; every mechanical
-engraver has some variation which is his
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_73" id="Page_73">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>73]</a></span>
-carefully guarded secret. The blocks may
-be of zinc or copper or other metal, and all
-sorts of chemicals are used. But I cannot
-too strongly impress upon you that good
-work in mechanical engraving is only to be
-obtained by artistic workmen; still, remarkable
-results are to be seen all about, even in
-the cheapest prints. But the very best process
-engravings are produced only by men
-who are artists and care for each block. In
-the case of the best engravers they will
-know better than you which process to use,
-and there is no more necessity for you to try
-to tell a mechanical engraver how the work
-is to be done, than for you to tell a wood
-engraver what tools he shall work with.
-Bad drawings may look better by one process
-than another, and good illustrations may
-be spoiled more by one method than another.
-But every intelligent engraver will try again
-and again until he gets the best result he can.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_74" id="Page_74">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>74]</a></span>
-The gelatine process consists in printing
-the picture on a sensitised film of gelatine.
-Now if this gelatine is soaked in water the
-parts representing the whites swell, and the
-darks, really the picture, remain as they were,
-as the light has rendered them insensible to
-water; from this swelled gelatine mould a
-cast in plaster of Paris can be taken, from
-this a wax mould is made, and finally an
-electrotype. The process is only used, I
-believe, by one firm; the results are good,
-but no better than the others.</p>
-
-<p>Let us consider for a moment what are
-the advantages and disadvantages of mechanical
-reproduction. The first advantage
-is rapidity of production&mdash;a facsimile wood
-engraving may take weeks to produce, a
-mechanical engraving takes a day or so;
-this is not an artistic but a commercial
-gain. The wood engraving loses, the more
-intricate and complicated and close the details
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_75" id="Page_75">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>75]</a></span>
-become; the mechanical or process engraving
-not infrequently gains.</p>
-
-<p>The wood engraver may make mistakes
-in cutting the lines in the wood block, but if
-the lines are properly put down, the camera
-and the process engraver should not; and if
-they do, much less time is lost and labour
-wasted than with wood engravings.</p>
-
-<p>Mechanical engraving is a much less costly
-method. These are not any of them very
-artistic reasons, but they count with publishers,
-and they count with you. But the
-great artistic advantage is that the artist
-may make his drawing of any size he wishes;
-it is not cut to pieces but preserved, and if
-it is properly drawn, as I have explained to
-you, it should produce in complicated work
-a more faithful result. In simple line work
-it is almost impossible to tell a wood engraving
-from a process block.</p>
-
-<p>The drawbacks are that the line is
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_76" id="Page_76">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>76]</a></span>
-sometimes too faithfully copied&mdash;that the engraving
-is shallow, and that the wood yields a
-richer, fatter effect than any metal, mechanical
-block.</p>
-
-<p>These are artistic drawbacks, but they may
-all be overcome by the artist. The line, if
-good, cannot be too faithfully copied; the
-engraving, if shallow, can be made deeper,
-engraved anew by the wood engraver. The
-fat line so much prized was made with a
-brush, and, as I have said, brush work reproduces
-perfectly. And in the majority of
-cases the original wood or process blocks
-are never printed from, but casts of them
-called stereotypes or electrotypes are used;
-therefore the fat line of the wood is more
-or less the product of the imagination. I
-do not mean to say the original wood or
-metal block will not give a richer impression
-than any cast from it, but I do say it is only
-in the case of proofs that the original is used.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_77" id="Page_77">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>77]</a></span>
-If a pencil or other drawing in line is to be
-reproduced, in which the varying colour of
-the pencil mark is to be retained, its greyness
-for example, or if the pen line is very
-delicate, or there are many single unsupported
-lines in the drawing, another method
-must be employed. A microscopically ruled
-glass screen, ruled with fine lines made with a
-diamond and filled in with ink, is placed in
-the camera in front of the glass plate on
-which the picture is to be photographed.
-There are various ways in which this is
-done, with the object of breaking up into
-line the tones which would otherwise print
-perfectly black, or, of supporting those weak
-lines which would print too heavily. This
-negative thus obtained is printed on to the
-zinc or copper plate, is then etched much as
-in the case of the simple line block. This
-process, usually called half-tone, was invented
-for reproducing wash, but is much used
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_78" id="Page_78">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>78]</a></span>
-now for line, especially when the dots or line
-of the screen are cut away by the wood
-engraver in the whites. The photo engraver
-is now endeavouring so to shift or adjust his
-screen that the dots will come only where
-they are wanted to break up the solid black,
-and some most interesting results have been
-obtained. When I am describing the reproduction
-of wash drawings, I shall return to
-this subject.</p>
-
-<p>Spaces of tint on line drawings can be and
-almost always are obtained by the use of
-what is known as shading mediums; that is,
-pieces of gelatine or copper with lines or dots
-engraved in them are filled with printer&rsquo;s ink,
-and these lines or dots are transferred by the
-engraver to the parts of the picture on the
-zinc plate where they are wanted before the
-plate is etched. There are many ways in
-which the artist can get the same effect by
-inking bits of silk and pressing them on the
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_79" id="Page_79">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>79]</a></span>
-drawing, by inking his thumb, or by drawing
-with a pencil or chalk or even pen over a
-rough book-cover, the only object is to get a
-bit of tone in a line drawing: in cheap work
-it is often very effective, in the best work it is
-usually out of place. All the artist need do is
-indicate the spot, or the outlines of the parts
-where the tint is wanted, by a blue pencil.
-If the engraver knows how the block is to be
-printed he will use the tint that will print
-best. They are all useful, but not very sympathetic.</p>
-
-<p>Photo-Lithography and kindred methods
-are either of little importance or will be referred
-to under Lithography. Finally, if the
-lines are too black or too strong they can be
-cut away or thinned, or darks opened up by
-the engraver, just as on a wood block; or a
-little wheel in a handle called a roulette may
-be run over parts of the engraving which are
-too heavy&mdash;the teeth of the wheel break the
-lines into dots and lighten them.</p>
-
-
-
-<div class="chapter">
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_80" id="Page_80">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>80]</a></span></p>
-
-<h2><a name="chap05" id="chap05"></a>LECTURE V.<br />
-<br />
-<span class="lecture">THE MAKING OF WASH DRAWINGS AND
-THEIR REPRODUCTION BY MECHANICAL
-PROCESS.</span></h2>
-</div>
-
-
-<p><span class="dropcap">W</span>HEN I speak of wash drawings, I
-would really refer to all painting or
-drawing, in colour or monochrome, in tone,
-as distinguished from work in line, which was
-the subject of my last lecture.</p>
-
-<p>Many persons do not like line work, never
-master it, and are insensible to its beauty
-when they see it. For these there is another
-method of expression, although, I cannot
-repeat too often, an illustrator should be able
-to work in more ways than one. One may
-make one&rsquo;s illustration in colour in oil, in
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_81" id="Page_81">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>81]</a></span>
-gouache, in body colour, in wash; in fact paint
-a picture in the usual way, though, even with
-the best and most careful methods of reproduction,
-it will be almost invariably found
-that in the various stages of photographing,
-etching and printing, very much, if not all,
-the charm has disappeared, even though the
-result be printed in colour, for up to the
-present no colour can be perfectly reproduced,
-or rendered into black and white,
-even by the best engraver in the world.
-And no colour can be reproduced except
-by the artist himself. A few men like
-Detaille, De Neuville, and Lynch have, I
-believe, invented a special colour scheme
-for the requirements of colour reproduction,
-and some of the engravings made from their
-pictures by Messrs. Boussod, Valladon &amp; Co.
-are very wonderful; but in the best examples
-I imagine there is an enormous amount of
-careful touching up and going over by hand,
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_82" id="Page_82">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>82]</a></span>
-which places these reproductions in the
-category of proofs rather than of prints.
-Certainly there is a vast difference between
-them and the colour work usually seen in the
-same firm&rsquo;s commercial publications, good as
-they are, and there is a yawning gulf between
-these and the colour print we have with us
-always. Therefore, if you wish to work in
-oil I would suggest that you work in monochrome,
-and further I would advise you to
-make your designs in simple black and white&mdash;that
-is if the reproduction is to be printed
-with black ink; for the nearer your original
-is to the colour in which it is to be printed,
-the nearer will the engraver and printer be
-able to approach it. I would also suggest
-that perfectly dead colours should be used,
-because varnish or any sort of glaze, shine
-or glitter, will tell in the photograph, and
-even the most careful engravers are rather
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_83" id="Page_83">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>83]</a></span>
-given to reproducing the photographic copy
-than the original, even though the latter be
-at their side.</p>
-
-<p>One method, that has been successful lately,
-is mixing oil colour with turpentine until it
-flows like water, and then working on paper;
-this reproduces most excellently, the only
-drawback being that the colour rubs off
-easily.</p>
-
-<p>Body colour and gouache are much used;
-the only thing to be remembered is that you
-should keep to the same colours and the
-same method of work all the way through
-each drawing. It is very interesting to
-combine body colour with wash; often in
-the original design the combination is most
-pleasing, but the camera does not approve
-of it, and frequently plays the most unexpected
-tricks with these combinations.
-Therefore, either stick to body colour, lamp
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_84" id="Page_84">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>84]</a></span>
-black, ivory black and white,<a name="FNanchor_3_3" id="FNanchor_3_3"></a><a href="#Footnote_3_3" class="fnanchor">[3]</a> or pure wash; in
-the latter case there is nothing which photographs
-so well as charcoal grey, made by
-Newman &amp; Co. The most delicate washes
-reproduce beautifully. It is rather hard to
-manage, but once you can manage it, it is
-almost perfect. It is best for work in a very
-light key, in the extreme darks it is liable to
-get heavy and sombre and gritty; and if you
-want a positive black it is well to put it in
-with ink or some stronger black, even at the
-risk of knocking things rather out of tone.
-The only objection to charcoal grey is that it
-is rather difficult to work over it. Still, in
-illustration in wash you will always get a
-cleaner, sharper effect by doing your drawing
-at once, getting your effect right with the first
-wash, than by any amount of tinkering at it.</p>
-
-<div class="footnote">
-<p><a name="Footnote_3_3" id="Footnote_3_3"></a><span class="label"><a href="#FNanchor_3_3">[3]</a></span>
-Winsor &amp; Newton and Reeves have lately
-been experimenting in this way, and their Albanine
-and Process black are well spoken of by photo
-engravers.</p>
-</div>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_85" id="Page_85">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>85]</a></span>
-In this pure wash work you should be
-careful, very careful, not to let any meaningless
-pencil lines show through, as they always
-photograph, cannot be taken out, and at times
-spoil the whole effect; in fact, imperfections in
-wash drawings always reproduce more perfectly
-than the perfections themselves, and it
-is well to keep your paper reasonably clean,
-to avoid smudging, blots and lines, or otherwise
-you will be disappointed in the result.
-It is often very effective in an original drawing
-to put in a lot of colour, but it nearly always
-comes out wrongly in the reproduction. On
-the other hand, although body colour often
-comes badly with wash, if you work over or
-into either your wash or body colour with
-pen, chalk, or pencil of the same substance
-as the wash, the result is harmonious often
-and excellent. I mean, if you make a drawing
-in wash with Indian ink and work on it
-with liquid Indian ink in a pen, the result will
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_86" id="Page_86">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>86]</a></span>
-be right. If you touch up charcoal grey with
-charcoal, the wash and line unite&mdash;these
-things, however, you will soon learn by experience,
-even though that experience is
-gained in a rather painful manner. Still, at
-present the better magazines and papers are
-not a practising ground for students, as they
-were some time ago, and you must be able
-to do good work before you can expect any
-intelligent editor to print it.</p>
-
-<p>Drawings or paintings&mdash;in fact all work in
-tone is reproduced mechanically by what is
-known as the half-tone process, which I
-referred to briefly in my last lecture.</p>
-
-<p>The drawing is photographed, but in front
-of the sensitised glass, a microscopically ruled
-screen is placed to break up this tone into
-dots or lines, really to get the same effect as
-the wood engraver obtains with his dots and
-lines. Otherwise, the tones being flat, or
-even if they are gradated, would print as
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_87" id="Page_87">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>87]</a></span>
-a black mass; but these screens break up the
-masses into little squares, which receive the
-printing ink on their faces, and the colour or
-original effect of the picture is thus preserved.
-It is rather difficult to explain this,
-but the screen produces white lines in the
-darks and dark lines in the whites; you can
-see them by looking at any block. Afterwards,
-the process is exactly the same as for
-line drawings. This reproduction of wash
-work is very uncertain; good effects are obtained,
-about as often as failures. The
-delicate tones are not infrequently altogether
-lost. There are no positive blacks or whites,
-but a uniform grey tint covers the entire
-block, in which all delicacy is often hidden.
-Therefore, to get a good effect, when
-printed, the drawing should be simply made,
-that is if it is for cheap engraving and
-rapid printing; but if for the best books
-and magazines, wood engravers may be
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_88" id="Page_88">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>88]</a></span>
-employed to remedy the imperfections of the
-photograph and the mistakes of the etcher.
-That is, whites may be cut, blacks toned
-down, lines thinned, or large spaces on the
-block may be left for the engraver to work
-upon: most remarkable results may be seen
-in the better American magazines.</p>
-
-<p>There are many qualities in a drawing
-which that senseless machine, the camera,
-will never reproduce. There are also a few
-points which it is very difficult (in tone work)
-for an engraver to render, but they may both
-combine and obtain most interesting effects.</p>
-
-<p>For instance, it is very difficult to give in
-a wood engraving the look of paint on
-canvas, without losing much of the picture
-itself, for if the wood engraver begins to try
-to imitate texture he not infrequently loses
-the subject. The mechanical process seems
-to do this very easily, especially if the
-brush marks on the canvas are at all prominent.
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_89" id="Page_89">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>89]</a></span>
-But the delicacy is frequently lost; so,
-too, are the strong blacks, though a good
-wood engraver can remedy these defects by
-treating the metal block just as though it
-was wood, engraving on it, cutting out, save
-where it is right, all the mechanical look.
-But two factors are necessary, first a good
-engraver, and, second, a publisher who is
-willing to pay for this engraving, which is
-expensive. The majority of publishers will
-not do so, though they will pay for the
-work of a good or notorious author. They
-will employ a feeble artist, a poor engraver,
-and a cheap printer, and talk of how much
-better the work was done thirty years ago.
-Of course it was; it was decently drawn and
-mostly badly engraved, vilely printed, but well
-paid for; now the photograph is the standard
-and the results are all about us; therefore
-you must think of the results. So make broad
-simple masses, keep your work as flat as you
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_90" id="Page_90">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>90]</a></span>
-can, remembering that all blacks will have
-the little white dots of the screen more or
-less showing through them&mdash;these can be
-kept out by the engraver, but they certainly
-will appear in the cheapest work; remembering
-that all delicate grey tones will be eaten
-up by the screen, therefore don&rsquo;t put them
-in if you can help it; and, finally, that unless
-whites are cut out they will never appear,
-instead you will have a dotted grey effect.</p>
-
-<p>In the very near future many of these
-imperfections will disappear, for you must
-remember that it is scarcely ten years since
-half tone began to be used at all. But look,
-whenever you see them&mdash;and they are everywhere&mdash;at
-the reproductions of half-tone
-work; try and study out how the artist got
-his effect; go to the art editor who published
-the drawing and ask to see the original.
-Talk with artists who do good work in black
-and white; they are mostly human, intelligent,
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_91" id="Page_91">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>91]</a></span>
-and willing to help and advise you. Go to
-the engravers&rsquo; shops and find out what the
-engraver will tell you, and to printing offices
-and see your work on the press.</p>
-
-<p>I have already spoken of the reproductions
-of line drawings by the half-tone process.
-One is sometimes tempted to wish that
-all line work could be reproduced by half
-tone and tone work could be reproduced by
-line, because if the line is delicate or the
-drawing is thin, the screen over it gives a
-tint which is pleasing, at times makes it look
-like an etching somewhat, especially if the
-tint be judiciously cut out. You might
-look at some of C.&nbsp;D. Gibson&rsquo;s work, where
-very great delicacy has been obtained in
-this way. Engravers are now endeavouring
-to get the tint just where it is wanted, and
-I have no doubt they will succeed. When
-they do, photo-engraving by the half-tone
-process will be greatly improved.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_92" id="Page_92">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>92]</a></span>
-Finally, study the requirements of the
-process not only as artists, but from the
-point of view of the engraver; go down to
-his shop and find out how the work is
-done; make him show and tell you; insist
-on seeing proofs of your drawings&mdash;good
-proofs, too; make corrections on them, first
-learning what corrections can be made. You
-cannot have blacks put in your engravings
-if they did not exist in the drawings, and,
-roughly speaking, you can only tone down,
-not strengthen any engraving; but you will
-find, save in cases of blacks, it is only toning
-down that the engraving wants, thinning and
-greying of lines.</p>
-
-<p>All this, I have no doubt, is very dry and
-uninteresting and tedious, but unless you get
-these things into your heads in the beginning,
-your drawings will not photograph well, engrave
-well, or print well; and if they don&rsquo;t,
-you will not get any illustration to do, and
-you may have yourselves to blame for it.</p>
-
-
-
-<div class="chapter">
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_93" id="Page_93">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>93]</a></span></p>
-
-<h2><a name="chap06" id="chap06"></a>LECTURE VI.<br />
-<br />
-<span class="lecture">REPRODUCTION OF DRAWINGS BY WOOD
-ENGRAVING.</span></h2>
-</div>
-
-
-<p><span class="dropcap">W</span>OOD engraving, as a fine art, has
-been virtually invented, developed,
-brought to apparent perfection, and yet ceased
-to exist, temporarily, almost, as a trade, in
-this century.</p>
-
-<p>A wood engraving is an engraving made
-with a graver, upon a cross section of box-wood,
-that is upon the end, and not the side,
-of a plank, in relief. As in the case of
-mechanical engraving, all the wood, excepting
-that underneath the design upon the
-block, is cut away, and the picture remains
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_94" id="Page_94">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>94]</a></span>
-alone in relief, raised upon the surface of the
-block of the same height as the type; thus
-the block may be placed on the press and
-printed with the type.</p>
-
-<p>The first great wood engraver was Thos.
-Bewick, and he, unlike many of his followers
-to-day, was an artist, and mostly made his
-own drawings on the block and cut them as
-he wished. He saw that wood engraving
-was a substitute for the slower, more tedious,
-and more expensive method of steel engraving;
-that, most important, many of the
-qualities of steel could be imitated in wood,
-as the same tools were used; that it could be
-printed with type; and, save that the richness
-of colour could not be retained, that it had
-most of the advantages of metal and few of
-its disadvantages, and was vastly cheaper.
-From the first, the imitation of steel was
-considered the proper aim, and though early
-in this century Stothard drew with a pen
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_95" id="Page_95">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>95]</a></span>
-upon the block, and his designs were facsimiled
-in the wood by Clennell, the prevailing
-fashion was the imitation of steel
-engraving, even by Bewick himself. Many
-of his lines are exactly those used by the
-steel engravers. By the middle of the
-century steel engraving virtually disappeared,
-its practitioners being unable to compete with
-wood engravers. There have been but few
-original engravers in this form of art, and
-though the work of some of the steel
-engravers who reproduced Turner and
-Roberts, Wilkie and Landseer, is marvellous,
-the art is almost dead at present.
-Cheapness has killed it. Wood engraving
-also killed lithography&mdash;a lithograph cannot
-be printed with type&mdash;and consequently the
-wood engraver became a most important
-person. He ran a shop with many assistants;
-he commissioned artists to make drawings
-for his assistants to engrave, he dictated
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_96" id="Page_96">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>96]</a></span>
-the way in which these drawings were to be
-done, the way in which the lines were to be
-drawn and washes made, so that they could
-be cut most easily. He commissioned
-writers to work up or down to the artists;
-he printed the books and sold them to the
-publishers, who were content to put their
-names on the title pages. And by this
-method much good and more bad work
-was accomplished, but the engraver finally
-became supreme, autocratic, dictatorial, insufferable;
-and then he vanished, as a shop.
-Process stepped in, in its turn, on account of
-its cheapness; and to-day, unless the engraver
-is an artist, he is but the slave of the process
-man, a hard fate&mdash;but his own. Before
-the introduction of photography, artists had
-to make their designs for the wood engraver
-the size they were wanted upon the block of
-wood, if portraits of places, reverse them, in
-pen, brush, pencil, or wash; the engraver cut
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_97" id="Page_97">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>97]</a></span>
-around and through these designs, making
-a translation of them in relief on the block
-which could be printed from. But the
-drawing had disappeared, and the artist
-had nothing but the engraving to show for
-it, hence endless difficulties arose; good
-artists hated to have their drawings cut to
-pieces; good engravers hated to have their
-work criticised unfavourably; also, drawing
-of a small size, and in reverse on the block
-was difficult to learn, and only a mechanical
-craft of no artistic advantage when
-learned. Therefore, as soon as it was
-possible to escape from the drudgery, to
-draw of any size on paper and have that
-drawing photographed on to a sensitised
-wood block, of the size it was wanted, in
-reverse, all artists took to it. And a new
-school of engravers arose, men who tried
-to invent new methods of engraving so that
-they could express the medium, as well as
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_98" id="Page_98">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>98]</a></span>
-the subject, in which a picture was produced.
-True from Stothard onward, through Meissonier
-and Menzel, engravers had tried to
-render pen and pencil drawings in line on
-wood; now everything began to be attempted,
-charcoal, etchings, steel, water colours, lithographs,
-oils. All the imperfections, accidents,
-and blemishes were preserved, even
-if the picture disappeared. But a number of
-most distinguished artist wood engravers
-appeared, especially in America, though few
-of them learned their trade in that country.
-But they received more encouragement,
-better pay, better printing, and better artists
-worked for them. And so the school of
-American wood engravers, many of whom
-are not Americans, was born.</p>
-
-<p>Now how is the modern work done?
-The artist&rsquo;s picture in any medium, of any
-size, is given to the photographer, who
-copies and reverses it, prints it on the
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_99" id="Page_99">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>99]</a></span>
-block of wood which has been sensitised
-for that purpose. The print is usually not
-very good, that is, it is darker, with many
-of the qualities of the drawing lost; but it
-serves only as a guide or a tracing for the
-engraver, who takes his tools, and with
-the drawing behind him, reflected in a
-mirror to reverse it, proceeds to cut the
-photograph of the drawing into relief, at
-the same time trying to preserve the look
-of the canvas, paper, or metal on which
-it was made, and the feeling of the colour,
-wash, or paint with which it was executed.
-All this is most difficult, but a most artistic
-result may be obtained, and one has but
-to refer to the magazines of America and
-some of the weekly papers of Germany,
-France, and Spain, for a proof of it.</p>
-
-<p>Here, though much good wood engraving
-has been printed, outside the offices
-of Messrs. Macmillan, Cassell and Co.,
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_100" id="Page_100">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>100]</a></span>
-and the <i>Graphic</i>, it has of late years been
-mostly in the form of copies, electrotypes,
-clich&eacute;s from foreign blocks which are supplied
-by their makers, all over the world,
-at a very low price, because they are not
-reserved for any one paper or book. And
-when you begin to see a man&rsquo;s painting,
-or drawing, or engraving in every paper,
-you begin to tire of him and his work.
-The editors of papers which publish clich&eacute;s
-seem to be the only people who like the
-multiplication and cheapening of art, but
-then there is no accounting for their tastes.
-The tools and appliances for making wood
-engravings are simple enough, but to engrave
-anything but <i>facsimile</i> work, or your own
-designs, will necessitate your going through
-considerable practical training; probably some
-years of apprenticeship.</p>
-
-<p>To cut line drawings on the wood, or to
-cut designs in large simple masses, you do
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_101" id="Page_101">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>101]</a></span>
-not require so much practice. All the tools
-you need are different sized gravers and
-gouges, a small chisel to cut large spaces,
-an engraver&rsquo;s rest for the block, so that it
-can be turned freely and easily about,
-and a whetstone to sharpen your tools.</p>
-
-<p>Lamps and globes for water, shades for
-your eyes, you will scarcely need, but a
-magnifying glass, something like that which
-watchmakers use, may be useful. With these
-simple tools and some box-wood&mdash;they can
-all be bought in East Harding Street or at
-any colour maker&rsquo;s&mdash;you have the necessary
-appliances.</p>
-
-<p>If you draw on the block, a slight wash
-of Chinese white will help to make it work
-easily. Draw with a brush or pencil; or if
-in wash, without body colour, as that will
-chip off. You have only to remember that
-the block, either plain or with the drawing
-on it, would print perfectly black, and that
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_102" id="Page_102">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>102]</a></span>
-every line you make with the graver in the
-surface of it, will print white. Therefore, as
-I have said, to get an outline engraving, you
-simply cut away everything but the drawing,
-which is left in relief on the surface of the
-block, and which alone prints, the rest of it
-being cut away. It is not necessary to
-engrave the surface very deeply, only so
-much that neither the ink nor the paper will
-touch in the hollows between the lines or
-masses. Mistakes are not easy to remedy,
-except by making a hole in the block and
-inserting a plug of wood, and then engraving
-that afresh.</p>
-
-<p>The art of engraving in <i>facsimile</i>, that
-is, of engraving around lines made with
-pen, or brush, or pencil, is comparatively
-easy, it only requires much training and
-a steady hand. But the ability to translate
-a work in colour into black and
-white, on a wood block, so that it shall
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_103" id="Page_103">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>103]</a></span>
-give a good idea of the original, is far
-more difficult. To do it well, the engraver
-must not only have the knowledge
-of the technical requirements of his craft
-at his finger ends, only to be gained after
-years of apprenticeship, but he must be a
-trained artist as well. If he wishes to get
-the best results, he must have the original
-before him, he must understand it and
-appreciate it. And finally, he must have
-the technical skill to engrave it. Even
-then, most likely, the artist will not like
-the block. It is a difficult art, a thankless
-art, save in the rarest cases: one which
-requires years of special training, and at
-present in this country, no matter how
-great an artist one is, there is very little
-chance to practise it. Work of this sort
-you cannot expect to be able to do without
-years of training; if you care for it you
-must apprentice yourself to a wood engraver.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_104" id="Page_104">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>104]</a></span>
-Still there are forms of wood engraving
-which you may take up, from the most
-primitive to the most complicated, and you
-may carry out the work from the designing
-of it to the printing of it yourselves, or, you
-may draw on the block and cut away, as
-in engravings by the late R.&nbsp;L. Stevenson
-(or were they done by Lloyd Osbourne or
-some other ghost?), and possibly you will
-have an experience like this:&mdash;</p>
-
-<div class="poemcenter">
-<div class="poem">
-<div class="stanza">
-<div class="i0">&ldquo;A blemish in the cut appears,<br /></div>
-<div class="i0">Alas, it cost both blood and tears.<br /></div>
-<div class="i0">The glancing graver swerved aside,<br /></div>
-<div class="i0">Fast flowed the artist&rsquo;s vital tide,<br /></div>
-<div class="i0">And now the apologetic bard<br /></div>
-<div class="i0">Demands indulgence for his pard.&rdquo;<br /></div>
-</div>
-</div>
-</div>
-
-<p>Or I imagine without much trouble you
-might invent something in the style of
-Valloton, a Frenchman, who is resurrecting
-wood cutting in a manner of his own, while
-carrying on the traditions of the old men. I
-hope you may be able to get as much life
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_105" id="Page_105">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>105]</a></span>
-and go in it as he has. Make your drawing
-on the wood, or on paper, have it photographed
-on the wood in the latter case,
-and cut around the lines, leaving only the
-drawing. The greatest difficulty is with fine
-lines, and you see how cleverly Valloton
-has avoided making them. Or, like Lep&egrave;re,
-another French artist&mdash;he would be a man
-to study with&mdash;do big, bold, effective things;
-or again you might attempt, as he does,
-colour work on wood, like that done by
-the Japanese, drawing it, engraving it, and
-printing it all yourselves.</p>
-
-<p>Or, take up drawing and engraving
-in the manner of Caldecott, Crane, or
-Kate Greenaway, when they were reproduced
-and printed by Edmund Evans.</p>
-
-<p>Process is fighting for colour too, but
-wood, at least in proofs, and that is all
-you would care for, gives some qualities
-far beyond process.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_106" id="Page_106">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>106]</a></span>
-In colour printing from wood blocks as
-many blocks must be made as there are
-colours, and there must be as many
-separate printings made from these blocks
-as there are colours in the printed picture.
-There must also be an outline block called
-the key block. Usually in European
-colour printing, whether from wood blocks,
-or by lithography, or even process, the
-colours are printed on top of each other;
-for example, a blue is printed over a
-yellow to get green, and at times several
-colours are superimposed, with the result
-that colour is lost and mud obtained. The
-Japanese have shown us how to make
-colour prints, however, and their method
-is now adopted by all intelligent colour
-printers. It consists in making the right
-colour before it is put on the block, and
-in placing the colours side by side like a
-mosaic. The work is done somewhat in
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_107" id="Page_107">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>107]</a></span>
-this way; the artist makes his drawing,
-several tracings (as many as there are
-colours) are made from it, and one extra
-tracing must be made of the outline only.
-Or rather the outline alone is cut on the
-block, other blocks are then made for each
-colour, or the parts cut out of the same
-block; one will contain all the red, another
-all the blue, a third the yellow, and so on.
-They must be very accurately cut, so as to
-fit together and print truly, and you can
-see from Japanese prints how wonderfully
-well the work is done. Of course the
-editions from such blocks are very limited,
-and on this account, like etchings, often
-vary, the printers having tried experiments
-in colour. The grain of the wood is taken
-advantage of in printing, as it often gives
-a lovely pattern; a good printer will wash
-in gradated skies with the backgrounds,
-and no matter how wonderfully they are
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_108" id="Page_108">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>108]</a></span>
-worked, if of the same colour, are printed
-usually from the same block. The
-Japanese, I believe, use water-colours;
-certainly the French and English, who
-have tried to imitate them, do, putting the
-colour, mixed with a little size or gum, on
-the face of the block with a sponge; in
-fact they are printed water-colours. Several
-Frenchmen have obtained in this way
-most notable results. Very similar was
-the fashion of colour printing called chiaroscuro,
-used in the early part of the century.
-The trouble with this was that the oil
-with which the inks were mixed, either
-ran, or spoiled the pages, or did not dry
-well. Drawings on grey paper in chalk
-can be wonderfully imitated in this way,
-and there are methods of using steel and
-copper plates, bitten into relief to get outlines
-or tints, which were also employed.
-To-day in the printing of wood engravings
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_109" id="Page_109">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>109]</a></span>
-and process blocks by steam, at many
-thousands an hour, the same system of
-colour printing, by placing the colours side
-by side, is being attempted, for it is impossible
-to obtain fine tone or rich effect
-by placing one colour on top of another,
-even in slow printing by hand, while it is
-absurd to attempt it rapidly by steam. In
-the most successful attempts yet made,
-those of the <i>Le Quotidien Illustr&eacute;</i> and <i>Le
-Rire</i>, Paris papers, colour printing from
-process blocks has been most successfully
-done, and I do not doubt that in a very
-few years colour printing in magazines and
-newspapers will be very general.</p>
-
-<p>As I have said, all intelligent printers
-have now come to the conclusion that
-simple flat colours, put on side by side,
-will alone give good artistic results; they
-have only learned this, however, after
-going quite to the other extreme: after
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_110" id="Page_110">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>110]</a></span>
-trying to get pure colour and rich effects
-by using the three primary colours on top
-of each other, they obtained but crudeness,
-vulgarity, and mud.</p>
-
-<p>Photography and chemistry are useful
-in art, but art cannot be created by these
-means. It may be that some one, some
-day, will be able to photograph a picture
-in colour, but there is as yet no evidence
-of it.</p>
-
-<p>Wood engravings may also be made by
-scraping or lowering the fronts or backs
-of blocks, and rich, soft, fat effects
-can be produced. Very little has been
-done, I think, with these lowered blocks,
-some remarkable examples of which can
-be seen in Chatto and Jackson&rsquo;s &ldquo;History
-of Wood Engraving.&rdquo;</p>
-
-<p>Photography has aided the artist very
-much in wood engraving (though most
-engravers say it has not), and especially
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_111" id="Page_111">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>111]</a></span>
-in colour printing it can be made great
-use of; as, instead of tracing a design on
-to several blocks, it can be photographed,
-thus ensuring accuracy&mdash;though the Japanese
-obtained this without any photographic aids&mdash;and
-saving much time.</p>
-
-<p>Still, that is about as far as it goes at
-present, and photography will never supersede
-art, though it is engaged in a famous
-struggle with artlessness.</p>
-
-
-
-<div class="chapter">
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_112" id="Page_112">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>112]</a></span></p>
-
-<h2><a name="chap07" id="chap07"></a>LECTURE VII.<br />
-<br />
-<span class="lecture">LITHOGRAPHY.</span></h2>
-</div>
-
-
-<p><span class="dropcap">L</span>ITHOGRAPHY, for some time the
-rival of metal engraving and even for
-a time of wood, was invented at the end of
-the last century, and, as its name implies, is
-the art of drawing or writing upon stone.
-Briefly, a peculiar grained stone, found in
-Germany, may be drawn upon with greasy
-chalk or ink; afterward it is slightly etched,
-only washed really, with weak nitric acid and
-water to fix the drawing and somewhat
-reduce the surface of the stone; if the stone
-be now covered with gum, allowed to dry,
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_113" id="Page_113">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>113]</a></span>
-and then inked, the ink adheres only to the
-drawing; and if a sheet of paper is placed
-on it, and the whole passed through a press,
-a print, or rather the drawing in ink, will
-come off on the paper. This is roughly the
-art of lithography.</p>
-
-<p>The most important consideration for you,
-however, is the making of the drawing.
-This may be done in one of two ways:
-either upon the stone itself, or upon transfer
-paper specially coated, so that the entire
-drawing is transferred from the paper on
-which it is drawn, by mechanical means, to
-the stone, and not merely a print from the
-original drawing. For many reasons it would
-probably be best to draw upon the stone
-itself always; because, first and above all,
-the less intervention&mdash;even mechanical intervention&mdash;there
-is between the artist and his
-work, the better; and in many cases it is not
-possible to get good results unless the artist
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_114" id="Page_114">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>114]</a></span>
-works on the stone. But if one has to make
-a large drawing out of doors, it is obviously
-impossible to carry about a big and heavy
-stone with one; therefore lithographic transfer
-paper must be used if the work is to be
-done from nature.</p>
-
-<p>Before this paper was perfected (it is very
-good now, and can be obtained from Hughes
-&amp; Kimber of West Harding Street, though
-Belfont&rsquo;s of Paris is the best), the artist either
-copied his sketches, studies, or pictures himself,
-on the stone, if he understood lithography;
-or else his drawings were copied for
-him by some other artists who were trained
-lithographers. One most notable example of
-this is to be found in J.&nbsp;F. Lewis&rsquo;s &ldquo;Alhambra.&rdquo;
-The originals by Lewis were
-redrawn on the stone by J.&nbsp;D. Harding, J.
-Lane, and W. Ganci, as well as by Lewis
-himself; inevitably some of these men&rsquo;s
-individuality was apparent, and even in the
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_115" id="Page_115">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>115]</a></span>
-case of Lewis, much must have been lost by
-copying his own designs; and if original
-work is given to professional lithographers,
-in ninety-nine cases out of one hundred all
-the real character is taken out of it. To-day,
-however, one may draw upon transfer paper,
-being careful only not to touch it with one&rsquo;s
-fingers, either in lithographic chalk or lithographic
-ink, which is only the chalk rubbed
-down and put on with a pen or brush, on
-this paper, which should be fastened down
-like an oil sketch, in a box having a cover,
-by drawing pins. Take the drawing to the
-printer; he will put it on the stone and
-print it for you far better than you can
-do it yourself; still this is rather expensive,
-as the transferring of the drawing to the
-stone and pulling a few proofs will cost you
-about a guinea. But if your design can be
-drawn in your own studio, or at the lithographer&rsquo;s,
-on the stone, it is not only much
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_116" id="Page_116">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>116]</a></span>
-simpler, but the result may be better, and
-you can employ more varied methods of
-work. For example, you may draw with
-the lithographic crayon&mdash;Lemercier&rsquo;s are
-the best; get them at Lechertier &amp; Barbe&rsquo;s&mdash;just
-as you would with ordinary chalk or
-crayon. For if the stone is grained like
-paper, the design, if well printed, should look
-almost exactly like a drawing on paper. On
-a smooth or ungrained stone you may draw
-or write with pen or brush and lithographic
-ink, which is only the crayon rubbed down
-with gum arabic, or ammonia and water, as
-you would rub down Indian ink, only you
-must heat the saucer in which you are rubbing
-it, a little. When you have done this,
-use Gillott&rsquo;s lithographic pens, putting the ink
-on the pen with a brush, or use a trimmed
-sable brush brought to a fine point; you
-must make your lines carefully, and get your
-ink of the right consistency, otherwise it
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_117" id="Page_117">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>117]</a></span>
-tends to blot and spread or smear. Again,
-you may mix more of the medium with the
-rubbed-down crayon. I should say it rubs,
-when warm, without water; this medium
-may be obtained ready mixed from Way &amp;
-Sons, Wellington Street, Strand; paint with
-it as you would in water colours, adding
-more of the medium or more ink as you wish
-little or much colour. I have tried only a
-couple of experiments in this way, and they
-were both complete failures. The trouble I
-found was this: in making light tones, the
-moment the brush charged with colour
-touches the stone, the stone itself turns
-much darker than the colour you are putting
-on it; and as it dries out very slowly,
-the making of a wash drawing is a most
-tedious process, unless one has had enough
-experience of the work to know just the
-effect of the finished drawing, or rather just
-the effect of the wash applied, which cannot
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_118" id="Page_118">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>118]</a></span>
-be seen in its proper tone, while working
-on the stone, since the appearance the stone
-presents so long as it is wet is absolutely
-different to what it will look like when dry,
-and it is almost impossible to work over
-washes, because the colour floats off if they
-are gone over again, or at least smudges
-and smears; still, corrections and additions
-can be made with the crayon point, and the
-whole design brought pretty well together.
-The best work in wash has been done by
-Lunois, a Frenchman. Corrections are at
-all times difficult to make in lithographs, the
-error having to be scratched out and the
-stone repaired in that spot, before the new
-work can be put in again.</p>
-
-<p>Stump drawings may be made by getting
-the crayon in powder and smearing it on the
-stone in masses with a rag. Effects can be
-obtained by removing too much colour with
-ordinary scrapers and putting in modelling
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_119" id="Page_119">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>119]</a></span>
-with stumps and the point of the crayon;
-or all three of the methods I have mentioned
-may be combined, as they often are, on the
-same stone, notably in the work of Hervier.</p>
-
-<p>Tints may be obtained by stippling and
-splatter work, as in pen drawings. There is
-a machine called an air brush, used by
-lithographers for this purpose, but the introduction
-of mechanical dodges has done
-much to harm lithography.</p>
-
-<p>Zinc may be grained and drawn upon in
-the same way; why this metal is not more
-generally used, I do not know, for it is much
-lighter, more portable, and can be easily
-mounted on a plain stone to print from.</p>
-
-<p>Until lately it was maintained that only
-what was drawn on stone could be got off
-it in a print. But Mr. Goulding, the etching
-printer, who has been making a series of experiments,
-says he can get almost as much
-variety of effect, by wiping the surface of
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_120" id="Page_120">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>120]</a></span>
-the stone carefully, in a small number of
-prints, as he can from a copper plate (<i>see</i>
-Lecture on <a href="#chap09">the printing of Etchings</a>). Still,
-for you, the process ordinarily will end with
-the drawing. Even the transferring is only
-to be successfully done by skilled workmen,
-and until you can print an etching decently,
-it would be scarcely worth while to try a
-lithograph.</p>
-
-<p>Considering that the process is perfectly
-autographic, that the materials are few and
-cheap, it is strange that it is so little employed
-at present. But a very serious
-attempt is being made to revive it, and as
-an artist like Mr. Whistler is the leader and
-initiator, I believe it will be successful.</p>
-
-<p>Colour printing by lithography, though
-very complicated, might be tried by you;
-as many stones must be prepared for
-transferring the design, made either on
-paper or stone, from the paper to stone,
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_121" id="Page_121">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>121]</a></span>
-or from one stone to another, as there
-are colours, and only that part of the design
-which is of one colour must appear on one
-stone; if you try to get colour prints
-in the usual fashion by printing one colour
-over the other, you will obtain the usual
-commercial muddling lithographic appearance.
-But if you mix your own colours for
-the lithographer, and have the colours placed
-side by side, in flat masses like the Japanese
-block prints (<i>see</i> <a href="#chap06">Wood Engraving</a> Lecture),
-you should get good results.</p>
-
-<p>There are endless other processes and
-methods of work, but they are all more or
-less complicated, and require special training
-and special tools, and even machinery, and
-one who wishes to pursue the subject further
-must go to a lithographer and learn the
-trade.</p>
-
-<p>But in order to get artistic effects only,
-one has but to draw or paint on paper or
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_122" id="Page_122">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>122]</a></span>
-stone as one would ordinarily. The means
-are most simple, and the results should be
-most interesting.</p>
-
-
-
-<div class="chapter">
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_123" id="Page_123">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>123]</a></span></p>
-
-<h2><a name="chap08" id="chap08"></a>LECTURE VIII.<br />
-<br />
-<span class="lecture">ETCHING.</span></h2>
-</div>
-
-
-<p><span class="dropcap">I</span>N all the various methods of making illustrations
-to which I have so far called
-your attention, it was necessary that some
-part of the work should be done by a
-specially trained craftsman, at least if any
-practical and commercial result was desired.</p>
-
-<p>Now in etching, the more you yourselves
-do and the less any one else does, the better
-should be the result.</p>
-
-<p>An etching is, in its narrowest sense, a print
-from a metal plate into which a design has
-been bitten or eaten by acid; again, in most
-of the other methods, the printing was from
-relief blocks like type, and therefore those
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_124" id="Page_124">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>124]</a></span>
-illustrations could be printed with type. Now
-we have to consider another sort of work,
-namely, intaglio, or incised, or sunken work
-not printed from the surface, but from lines
-cut below it, and therefore unavailable for
-letterpress printing. Of course it would be
-easy to make a relief block in metal, or an
-incised block of wood, to reverse the treatment
-in printing, but it would not be natural
-or right.</p>
-
-<p>The whole difference is this: if a wood
-block has a line cut in the surface and the
-whole face is inked with a roller, the line will
-print white and the rest of the block black.
-If the etching plate is inked and cleaned off,
-as is always done, it will print white; if a
-line is cut in it, the ink will remain in that
-and produce a black line. Of course they
-must be printed in appropriate presses.</p>
-
-<p>In its broadest sense an etching may be
-produced in any one of a number of ways,
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_125" id="Page_125">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>125]</a></span>
-by the artist, on a metal plate which may be
-printed from.</p>
-
-<p>It is never a process or mechanical engraving,
-and never was and never will be,
-and the attempt to palm off mechanical
-blocks or plates is a swindle and a humbug.</p>
-
-<p>Etchings are produced in the following
-manner; at least this is the best and simplest
-method.</p>
-
-<p>A plate of highly polished copper, zinc, or
-even steel, iron, or aluminium is obtained
-from the makers, William Longman, of
-Johnson&rsquo;s Court, Fleet Street, or from
-Messrs. Hughes &amp; Kimber, West Harding
-Street, Fetter Lane, or Messrs. Roberson,
-99, Long Acre. Copper, however, is the
-best and almost universally used. This
-should be carefully cleaned with a soft rag
-and whiting; then it should be gripped by a
-vice with a wooden handle, in one corner,
-care being taken to put a piece of soft paper
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_126" id="Page_126">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>126]</a></span>
-between the vice and the plate to keep the
-teeth of the former from scratching it; heated,
-either upon an iron frame with a spirit or
-Bunsen lamp under it, or over the gas, until,
-if you take a ball of etching ground and
-touch the plate with it, the ground melts.
-This ground is made of resin, wax, and gum;
-the best is made by Sellers in England and
-Cadart in France. All these materials can be
-bought of Roberson or Hughes &amp; Kimber.
-Touch the hot plate in several places with
-the ground. It should melt at once; then
-take an American etching roller (which I
-think you can only obtain at Roberson&rsquo;s) and
-go over the plate rapidly with it in every
-direction, until the little masses of melted
-ground have been spread evenly and thinly
-in a film all over it. With a little practice
-you should be able to do this in a couple of
-minutes, and you can lay in this way (which
-is unknown virtually in England) a thinner,
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_127" id="Page_127">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>127]</a></span>
-harder, more even and very much better
-ground, with less trouble, than in any other.
-Heat the plate again a little more, and take
-a bundle of wax tapers twisted together by
-heating them, light them and pass them
-under the face of the plate held, varnished
-side downwards, by the vice; do not touch
-the plate with the taper, or the varnish,
-being still melted, will come off, but go
-rapidly back and forward, allowing the flame
-only to touch the surface. In a few minutes
-the varnish will have been completely
-blackened by the smoke. Next, take a
-bottle of stopping-out varnish (which you
-may as well buy; don&rsquo;t bother to make it)
-and cover the back and edges of the plate.
-If this is done while the plate is hot, it dries
-very fast, and as soon as the plate is cool it
-is ready to work on.</p>
-
-<p>This is the first stage. The waxy ground
-is put on to protect the plate from the acid
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_128" id="Page_128">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>128]</a></span>
-with which it is to be bitten, and it must be
-so well made and well put on, that one can
-draw through it, without tearing it up and
-without any resistance; also it must adhere
-firmly to the plate, where it is not drawn
-through, and must resist the acid perfectly in
-the untouched parts. The smoking is done
-to enable you to see your lines in the copper,
-light on dark; this is rather curious at first,
-but you will get used to it. The stopping-out
-varnish is also to protect the plate, and is
-only a cheaper sort of ground dissolved in oil
-of lavender or ether. When the plate is
-cool, it should be of a brilliant uniform black,
-and if there are any dull, smoky-looking
-places on it, the ground is burnt. Here the
-ground may be rubbed off, or will show
-cracks, if you touch it, in these places, and
-the varnish should be cleaned off the face
-with turpentine, the plate carefully dried and
-regrounded. Otherwise the varnish will
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_129" id="Page_129">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>129]</a></span>
-either crack while you are drawing on it,
-or come off in the bath of acid, and your
-work will be spoiled.</p>
-
-<p>You draw upon the varnished plate with
-needles or points; any steel points will do,
-from a knitting-needle to the best big point
-you can get. The small needles invented by
-Mr. Whistler I find the best; but this is a
-personal liking. They are of all shapes and
-sizes. You may commence and draw in
-your entire subject, only remembering that
-you must leave your foreground lines further
-apart than those in the distance.</p>
-
-<p>You may make your drawing either with
-the same needle, all over, or with needles of
-different sizes; for though one half of the
-art is in the drawing, the other half, and the
-really characteristic half, is in the biting.
-There is very little to be said about the
-drawing, save that you must draw just as
-well as ever you can; you will find out almost
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_130" id="Page_130">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>130]</a></span>
-immediately that you have the most responsive
-tool in your fingers, and that you can
-work with it in any direction. Do not
-bother, if you use the same needle, because
-the drawing looks flat, and the lines are of
-the same width; the biting will fix all that.
-Draw away; if you are afraid to tackle
-the copper straight away with a point,
-paint your design on it, with a little
-Chinese white, or, if you have a pencil
-drawing of the subject, you may make a
-tracing from it, and go over that, transferring
-it to the plate; or you may turn the
-drawing face down and run it through a
-copper plate press; the drawing will come off
-on the varnished surface in reverse, and if
-you are doing a portrait of a place you must
-otherwise reverse it yourself. If you wish
-to sketch from nature in reverse, put up a
-mirror on an easel, and turn your back to
-the subject, drawing from the picture in the
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_131" id="Page_131">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>131]</a></span>
-mirror, for, you must remember, that any
-subject drawn, as you see it, on a copper
-plate, or even a wood-block, prints in reverse.</p>
-
-<p>Next, to bite or etch the drawing into the
-copper plate, take equal parts of nitric acid
-and water and mix them in a glass-stoppered
-bottle, some hours before you wish to use
-the mixture, for there is enough heat produced
-by the chemical action to melt the
-ground if it is used at once.</p>
-
-<p>Or have a quantity of what is known as
-Dutch mordant made; this is composed of&mdash;</p>
-
-<p>
-Two parts Chlorate of Potash,<br />
-Ten parts Hydrochloric Acid,<br />
-Eighty-eight parts water.<br />
-</p>
-
-<p>Next, get an ordinary photographer&rsquo;s porcelain
-or rubber bath or tray; lay the plate in
-it, pour the acid over it; in a few seconds
-bubbles will arise, in all the lines; brush
-them away with a feather; leave the plate, if
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_132" id="Page_132">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>132]</a></span>
-there is any fine work on it, in the bath for
-only two or three minutes, say for a light
-sky; take it out with rubber finger-tips or a
-stick, for the acid will burn your fingers and
-a drop will rot your clothes, staining them
-light yellow; wash the plate thoroughly in
-clean water, dry it carefully with blotting-paper.
-Take some of your stopping-out
-varnish, thin it with a little (a very little)
-turpentine, paint over the very lightest parts
-of the drawing with a camel&rsquo;s-hair brush
-dipped in the diluted varnish, and thus stop
-them out&mdash;that is, stop them from biting any
-more by painting them with the varnish.
-Wait till the places where you have painted
-the varnish are thoroughly dry; then put the
-plate in the bath again and bite the next
-stronger, nearer set of lines; of course, save
-where the lines are covered by the stopping-out
-varnish, they will keep on biting.
-Continue biting and stopping out till you get
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_133" id="Page_133">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>133]</a></span>
-to the foreground, where the lines should now
-be quite broad and deep; take off the ground
-front and back by washing it with a rag
-dipped in turpentine, dry it, and the plate is
-ready to print from.</p>
-
-<p>Another method is to commence by drawing
-in the darks, biting them, then drawing
-in the middle distance, the darks going on
-biting all the while, and finally the extreme
-distance, when the whole plate will be biting
-together; by this method no stopping out is
-necessary, but in working out of doors it is
-awkward to carry baths and acid around with
-one, otherwise one must run back to the
-studio, to bite between each stage. But
-these two methods can be mixed up, and
-frequently are, and you may also work in the
-bath, drawing lines through or over others,
-thus getting richness while the biting is going
-on. The bad fumes which are given off
-during the biting are not dangerous. In
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_134" id="Page_134">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>134]</a></span>
-working with the Dutch mordant, which
-bites slower than nitric acid and makes
-no bubbles, but bites straight down, while
-nitric acid enlarges the lines laterally, you
-will inhale much of the fumes, but they
-won&rsquo;t hurt you. Although you do not see
-any action with the Dutch mordant, brush
-the lines with a feather, else a deposit is
-formed and they will bite unevenly.</p>
-
-<p>It is very difficult to tell when a plate is
-well bitten, the biting is very difficult, but on
-taking it out of the bath and holding it on a
-level with your eye, you can see the bitten
-lines; you can also feel the biting with a
-needle, and you may take off a bit of the
-varnish with your thumb-nail or turpentine
-and look at the lines, re-covering them again
-with the stopping-out varnish; but after this,
-of course, they will not bite in that place.</p>
-
-<p>Again, the lines do not bite evenly; where
-they are close together they bite faster, and,
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_135" id="Page_135">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>135]</a></span>
-after the plate has been in the acid some
-time, it may change its speed of biting;
-differences of atmosphere and temperature
-affect it even with the same acid on the
-same day; if the nitric acid is too weak
-add more acid; if too strong pour in
-water, and quick, else the ground will come
-off: it is too strong when it boils and
-bubbles all over; it is too weak when there
-are no bubbles. Dutch mordant eats always
-slowly, and never, so far as I know, destroys
-the ground. At the last, for very strong
-darks, you may sometimes use a little pure
-nitric acid, but it will most likely tear up the
-ground, and if you leave it long enough will
-spoil all your lines, giving you only a great
-black hole. These are the systems employed
-by all etchers; the lengthy dissertations about
-white ground, silver ground, positive and
-negative processes, need not concern you,
-they are never practised, and mostly
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_136" id="Page_136">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>136]</a></span>
-unknown to the best men. These simple
-directions should enable you to produce
-artistic plates, if you have the necessary
-ability. Still, when you have had a proof
-of your plate pulled&mdash;I will talk of printing
-in the next lecture&mdash;you will find that there
-are all sorts of imperfections in it, possibly
-holes, places where it is not bitten enough or
-too much bitten, or that it is too dark or too
-light all over; it is but seldom that a plate
-is right when the first proof is pulled. If
-you find a hole bitten in it, take a burnishing
-tool, flatten the hole down as much as
-possible, find the place on the back with
-a pair of calipers, hammer it up from the
-back, placing it on an anvil, burnish it again
-and polish the surface with charcoal, oil, and
-rags; revarnish the place, redraw, and rebite
-it. If it is only a small place you may take
-up some nitric acid on a feather, and paint
-the little spot to be rebitten with that. A
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_137" id="Page_137">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>137]</a></span>
-few drops of the acid have nearly as much
-power as a great deal. In fact you may
-paint the face of your plate with acid and do
-your biting in that way, without ever immersing
-it in the bath at all. If it is too
-much bitten it must be rubbed down with
-charcoal and oil, a tedious process. If it
-is too light it must be rebitten all over; then
-take a rebiting roller, putting some liquid
-etching ground on a separate plate, take
-the ground up on the roller and roll the face
-of the plate very carefully; the ground
-should cover the face without going into
-any of the lines; heat it very slightly to
-dry the ground, leave it for a day or so
-and then bite as before. If there are
-places where lines want joining or little
-touches of dark would be effective, put them
-in with a graver or a point.</p>
-
-<p>You may use a graver altogether, and
-produce a line engraving; or a point,
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_138" id="Page_138">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>138]</a></span>
-either steel or diamond, and make what
-is known as a dry-point etching, that
-is, merely a scratched drawing on the
-copper; the point throws up, as you draw
-with it, a furrow, which is greater or less as
-you incline the point, and this holds the
-ink, and is called burr, and gives for a few
-proofs great richness; a steel face can, however,
-be put on the copper plate, and any
-number of pulls may be taken. The difference
-between the cutting of lines with a
-graver and the drawing of them with a point
-is this: the graver, both in metal and wood,
-is pushed from one; the point in etching,
-and even the knives in wood cutting, are
-drawn toward one.</p>
-
-<p>Messrs. Roberson have invented a plate
-of celluloid which, for dry point work, seems
-to be fairly good, and as this plate is white
-or cream-coloured, as one draws on it the
-lines may be filled up with paint, and one
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_139" id="Page_139">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>139]</a></span>
-may thus see the drawing as one works. Of
-course, the same thing may be done with
-dry point on copper. The great advantage
-of the celluloid is its lightness. It must not,
-however, be heated in printing, otherwise it
-will be ruined. Many etchers are now
-making experiments with aluminium, but no
-certain results have as yet been obtained.</p>
-
-<p>There are many other forms of engraving
-included under the title of Etching, although,
-properly speaking, they have nothing to do
-with it.</p>
-
-<p>Aquatint: a ground, made by depositing
-powdered resin in solution with spirits
-of wine, is poured on the plate, slightly
-heated, and as it dries the resin adheres to
-the plate and cracks up irregularly; a drawing
-may be made on this, and stopped out
-in the usual way. Or powdered resin may
-be sprinkled on the plate, heated, when it
-will adhere, or the plate may be placed in
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_140" id="Page_140">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>140]</a></span>
-a box containing resin in very fine powder,
-heated, and the box shaken; the resin will
-settle on it and produce the ground.</p>
-
-<p>A very similar ground may be made by
-passing the ordinarily-grounded plate through
-a copper-plate printing-press, with a piece
-of sandpaper over it, three or four times,
-then the design may be painted on it in
-stopping-out varnish, and at times a very
-good result may be obtained. Lines may
-be put in, etched before the ground is laid;
-but personally I don&rsquo;t like the lines at all;
-without them the result is rather like a
-bitten painting. Silk and canvas can also
-be placed on the grounded plate, which is
-then run through the press, to get tints in
-the ground.</p>
-
-<p>Tints may be obtained after the plate is
-bitten by painting it with olive oil and
-sprinkling flowers of sulphur on it, which
-gives a very charming tint, but it does not
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_141" id="Page_141">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>141]</a></span>
-last long; I believe that if acid is poured
-over it, it may last better. Mr. Frank
-Short says so, but I have never tried the
-experiment.</p>
-
-<p>Soft ground etchings are made by mixing
-etching ground and tallow together in equal
-proportions, covering the plate with this
-composition by means of the roller: that is,
-put some of the composition on a clean
-plate, pass the roller over it till it is covered
-with the soft ground, and then roll it on to
-the plate on which you propose to work,
-smoke it and then stretch a piece of rough-grained
-or lined drawing paper over the
-face, as paper is stretched for making
-water-colours, draw upon this with a lead
-pencil and then carefully take the paper
-off; you must not rest on or touch the
-plate with your fingers; the ground comes
-away with the paper where the pencil
-has passed, and the design is seen on the
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_142" id="Page_142">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>142]</a></span>
-copper, and is then to be bitten in as in
-ordinary etching.</p>
-
-<p>Mezzotint is also included, for some unknown
-reason, with etching. The face of
-the plate is roughened in every direction
-by going over it with a toothed instrument
-called a rocker, until it will print perfectly
-black; the design is then traced on it; the
-drawing is made by scraping down the
-lights, and finally by burnishing the whites
-quite smooth.</p>
-
-<p>Tint effects can also be obtained by a
-smooth-toothed wheel, the roulette, the same
-as that used by process engravers; only
-here it produces blacks, while they use it
-to get lights.</p>
-
-<p>Monotypes, that is paintings made in
-colour or black and white on a bare copper
-plate in the usual way, though they must
-be handled thinly, may be passed through
-the press, and they will yield one exquisitely
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_143" id="Page_143">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>143]</a></span>
-soft and delicate impression. The electrotyping
-and duplicating of them changes
-their character and value entirely: it is a
-ridiculous and inartistic proceeding.</p>
-
-<p>But after going through all this list,&mdash;I
-have barely referred to steel engraving in
-line, which, as I have said, is only working
-with an ordinary graver in steel, and is slow
-and tedious, unsatisfactory drudgery; or
-to stipple engraving, dotting and biting in
-dots, instead of lines, as practised by Bartolozzi,&mdash;one
-comes back to the simple
-method I described at first, the method
-with some improvements of Rembrandt,
-the method of Whistler, or in dry point
-the method of Helleu; and what is good
-enough for those masters should be good
-enough for you.</p>
-
-
-
-<div class="chapter">
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_144" id="Page_144">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>144]</a></span></p>
-
-<h2><a name="chap09" id="chap09"></a>LECTURE IX.<br />
-<br />
-<span class="lecture">THE PRINTING OF ETCHINGS.</span></h2>
-</div>
-
-
-<p><span class="dropcap">W</span>HICH is the more interesting and
-amusing&mdash;the drawing, biting, or
-printing of an etching has never been
-decided. But no artist is willing, if he can
-help it, to allow any one else, once he has
-mastered the method of work, to perform
-any part of the operation for him.</p>
-
-<p>The printing of an etching is, in theory,
-very simple; in practice, it is most difficult,
-but most delightful.</p>
-
-<p>The plate being bitten, as I have described
-in a previous lecture, must now be printed,
-for the prints from it, and not the plate itself,
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_145" id="Page_145">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>145]</a></span>
-are the end of etching&mdash;really of all illustration.</p>
-
-<p>You will have to spend several pounds
-on an etching outfit, so you had better get
-a good one. The small ones, including press,
-ink, chemicals, quite complete, sold by Roberson,
-of 99, Long Acre, are most excellent
-as far as they go, for small plates, and taking
-round the country with one on a sketching
-tour; but for serious work, a more practical
-set of tools is necessary. Therefore I would
-advise you first to take lessons of a good
-etcher, who will allow you to work with him,
-or to go to a printer and get him to show
-you how the work is done.</p>
-
-<p>This is the method: the first thing to do
-is to obtain some good handmade paper,
-almost all old paper is excellent; it should
-be unruled, of course; often the tone of it
-is lovely, and it may contain most beautiful
-water-marks. I am referring to Dutch,
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_146" id="Page_146">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>146]</a></span>
-French, English, or German papers of at
-least a century old. At times you may be able
-to pick up old ledgers, account-books, or
-packages of unprinted paper; treasure them
-up; if you don&rsquo;t print etchings on them, there
-is nothing more delightful to draw upon.
-There are also Japanese and India papers,
-which give most beautiful delicate translucent
-effect to prints. Vellum, parchment, and
-even silk or satin may be printed on. But
-as a general rule the old handmade Dutch
-paper is the most satisfactory, if you can
-get it. For ordinary work and experiments,
-modern paper is quite good enough, and
-very good handmade paper can be obtained
-from Roberson&rsquo;s. Let us suppose you are
-going to print; twenty-four hours before,
-take several sheets of paper, rather more
-than you want, in case of failure or for any
-other reason; cut the sheets the size you
-desire them, a little larger than the plate,
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_147" id="Page_147">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>147]</a></span>
-so as to leave a decent margin. Cut the
-paper first; Japanese paper, for example,
-cannot easily be cut when it is wet. Get
-a sheet of window glass, lay it flat on a table,
-take the first sheet of paper and damp it on
-one side by passing a wet sponge over it,
-lay it on the glass; on top of this sheet lay
-another dry one; damp the top of that with
-the sponge; and continue laying down sheets
-and damping their upper faces till you have
-enough; put another sheet of window glass
-on the top, and a heavy weight upon it; in
-a day the whole mass should be completely
-dampened all through. I believe the same
-thing can be done by a copying press and
-book, and I have heard it is so done by
-lithographers, but the way I have described
-is the usual one that is followed by plate
-printers. The next thing is the press. A
-good secondhand one may be bought at
-Hughes &amp; Kimber&rsquo;s, West Harding Street,
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_148" id="Page_148">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>148]</a></span>
-Fetter Lane, for about five pounds. Much
-depends, however, on the size and finish.
-You should have it brought to your studio,
-set up and adjusted for you by skilled workmen.
-Then you must buy a heater and a
-jigger for your plates, ink, oil, canvas, and
-a number of other things, dabbers, a muller,
-an ink-slab, and a big palette knife; all these
-will run up a bill of ten pounds or so.</p>
-
-<p>But having your press and other things,
-let us go to work: light the gas-burners
-under the heater which you have bought;
-if too much flame comes out and makes the
-iron top too hot, plug up some of the jets.
-Put your plate on the top of the heater.
-First, however, see that your press is adjusted,
-so that the plate will fit in. To do
-this, put a piece of paper on the top of the
-plate and run it in the press to try it, and see
-if it goes under the roller without tearing the
-paper. Take some of the ink out of the
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_149" id="Page_149">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>149]</a></span>
-can, or better, get it in powder, put it on
-the ink-slab and mix it with oil with the
-palette knife; then take the muller and grind
-the ink until it is thoroughly ground and
-mixed and of about the thickness of paint
-as it comes out of the tube. But each plate
-will require more or less oil or colour, and
-some brown, red, or possibly blue mixed
-with it to take off the crude raw look which
-pure black often has in the print. The plate
-being now warm, not so hot as to boil or
-burn the ink, dab with a dabber the ink
-from the slab all over the face of the plate
-(it is warmed to wipe the ink off easily), slide
-it from the heater to the wooden box called
-a jigger, which must be placed alongside
-the former. You should get a printer to
-arrange your things for you. Take a piece
-of the rag or canvas for wiping, double it
-carefully and loosely in your hand&mdash;this
-requires much practice&mdash;and remove all the
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_150" id="Page_150">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>150]</a></span>
-ink which is on the surface of the plate.
-Even after you have wiped it some time, an
-oily film will remain, which, unless you polish
-the plate with whiting rubbed on your
-hand, you cannot remove, and you do not
-want to, because the oil gives a delicious
-tone to the print. Some ink may be left
-in places on the surface to increase and
-strengthen the work, but what you must
-learn to do is not to wipe any of the ink out
-of the bitten lines. This is very difficult,
-and if you do wipe it out, you must commence
-all over again, only the chances are
-that you will know nothing about this until
-the plate is printed. The colour may also
-be increased by going over the surface of the
-plate, having again warmed it, if it has become
-cool, with a bit of soft taffatas silk
-with a trembling muscular motion of the arm
-and fingers. This action, called retroussage,
-which must be seen to be understood, drags
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_151" id="Page_151">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>151]</a></span>
-the ink slightly over the surface of the plate
-without taking much out of the lines.</p>
-
-<p>Now take off the weights from your paper,
-take up a sheet, which should be thoroughly
-damped, first brushing it with a soft brush
-to remove any drops of water or dirt or dust.
-The paper should be placed near the press.
-Put the plate face upwards on the press,
-on which the blankets have been properly
-arranged&mdash;you must see this done for yourselves&mdash;the
-plate underneath of course; lay
-the sheet of damp paper on the face of the
-plate and run it through the press once; it
-is well to put a sheet of ordinary thick paper
-on the top of the damp sheet, otherwise the
-latter will stick to the blankets; raise the
-blankets and take up the first sheet of paper,
-the print will most likely adhere to that, if it
-does not, take it up carefully by one edge, it
-will come away from the copper, and you
-will find the print on the under side of it.</p>
-
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_152" id="Page_152">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>152]</a></span>
-Japanese and India prints require very careful
-handling, especially the latter. They are
-usually printed on to a sheet of plate paper
-by dusting it, or the back of the India paper,
-with flour; this, on passing through the press,
-is made into paste by the dampness of the
-India paper, and they are thus moulded
-together.</p>
-
-<p>As soon as the prints are taken off the
-press, put them between sheets of blotting
-paper and allow them to dry for some time,
-they will come out flat; if you neglect this,
-they will crinkle up very badly, and are
-difficult to get smooth again.</p>
-
-<p>This is the way a copper plate is printed,
-but you must see it done and practise for a
-long time before you can do it decently.</p>
-
-<p>Colour prints from copper plates may be
-made in one or more ways. The various
-colours may be put on by applying them
-where they are wanted with stumps, or the
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_153" id="Page_153">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>153]</a></span>
-plate may be painted by applying the colours
-with brushes. Several plates may be used,
-just as in lithography or coloured block
-printing, and these coloured plates wiped as
-I have been describing. Many prints, however,
-are coloured by hand after they are
-printed.</p>
-
-<p>Mezzotints, acquatints, steel engravings,
-&amp;c., are printed in the same way as copper-plates.
-The rubbing with the canvas and
-the hand, and the tremendous pressure to
-which the plates are subjected, quickly spoil
-the clearness and sharpness of the lines;
-therefore if any large number of prints are
-wanted, a coating of steel is put on the
-face of the copper-plate by steel-plating it;
-this protects the copper, and as soon as the
-steel facing shows signs of wear it may be
-removed, and a new film of steel applied;
-hence an unlimited edition can be printed
-in time from a copper plate. If it is
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_154" id="Page_154">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>154]</a></span>
-necessary that the printing should be done
-more rapidly, electrotypes can be made
-from the original copper-plate (<i>see</i> <a href="#chap11">electrotype
-and stereotype</a> Lecture), and several
-printers can then work on these electrotypes
-at the same time. The electrotypes are
-rarely equal to the originals.</p>
-
-<p>Such is a brief outline of the method of
-printing copper plates; but I cannot too
-strongly impress upon you the fact that it is
-a handicraft which, though most interesting,
-requires long apprenticeship, with a master
-printer, and in one&rsquo;s studio, before good
-results can be obtained.</p>
-
-
-
-<div class="chapter">
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_155" id="Page_155">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>155]</a></span></p>
-
-<h2><a name="chap10" id="chap10"></a>LECTURE X.<br />
-<br />
-<span class="lecture">PHOTOGRAVURE AND PHOTO-LITHOGRAPHY,
-ETC.</span></h2>
-</div>
-
-
-<p><span class="dropcap">T</span>HESE processes or methods of reproduction
-are the outcome of the
-endeavour to supersede the artist and engraver.
-They are quite mechanical, or
-should be; in fact the less evidence there
-is of any intervention on the part of the
-operator or maker of a photographic plate,
-the better it will be for the work which
-is being reproduced; still, if an artist turns
-his attention to these processes, the finest
-results are obtained, even though he must
-completely efface himself in the work. M.
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_156" id="Page_156">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>156]</a></span>
-Amand Durand made the best photogravures
-ever produced because he was an
-artist. No mere photographic or mechanical
-engraver ever approached him.</p>
-
-<p>The theory of photogravure and photo-lithography,
-in the best work, is the same
-as that of photo-engraving, which is described
-in a previous Lecture. In photogravure a
-photograph of a drawing is usually made on
-a sensitised copper plate; this is coated with
-some acid-resisting varnish, but when the
-varnished plate is washed with water or
-some acid, the varnish covering the picture
-on the plate comes away, leaving the picture
-on the bare copper. This is then bitten in
-exactly the same way as an etching, the
-success of the plate depending entirely on
-the artistic intelligence of the person who
-does the biting. Or else the photographic
-print is made on the varnish itself just
-exactly in the same way as for a zinc block;
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_157" id="Page_157">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>157]</a></span>
-only in this case the picture is washed away
-and not the surrounding portions; the biting
-is then proceeded with.</p>
-
-<p>There are also many other processes
-of photogravure, while heliotype, autotype,
-Woodbury-type, collotype, are closely allied
-to it. The word type is probably used
-simply because by none of these methods
-can the plates be used with letterpress. All
-these processes, however, are very complicated,
-require expensive machinery, are quite
-outside the field of art, most secret, and,
-except theoretically, of little importance to
-you.</p>
-
-<p>A good photogravure, for example, by
-Amand Durand or Ch. Dujardin is often
-a most excellent reproduction of a line-drawing
-or an etching&mdash;so good, in fact,
-as to be almost indistinguishable from an
-etching. But to endeavour to palm off pen
-drawings as etchings, when they have been
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_158" id="Page_158">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>158]</a></span>
-reproduced in some such way, is to act the
-part of a common swindler.</p>
-
-<p>Photo-lithography is exactly the same as
-photo-zincography&mdash;process block-making.
-The drawing is photographed on to transfer
-paper, covered with lithographic ink and
-transferred to the stone like any other lithograph.
-This is a mechanical process; there
-are a number of ways of getting the drawing
-on to the stone, and the results are described
-under many names. Collotypes and other
-varieties of photographic prints are made
-from gelatine or other films; they require
-expensive machines to produce, they are all
-mechanical processes which you could not
-readily use unless you went into the business,
-and are quite outside your art.</p>
-
-<p>One is being continually shown processes
-which are going to revolutionise engraving
-and incidentally do away with the artist;
-this has not yet been accomplished. But
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_159" id="Page_159">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>159]</a></span>
-just as one sees to-day the momentary
-triumph of the photographer&mdash;or rather of
-the person who is exploiting the poor photographer&mdash;one
-may remember that chromos
-have not annihilated painting, nor can the
-photograph ever be anything more than a
-useful aid to illustration.</p>
-
-
-
-<div class="chapter">
-<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_160" id="Page_160">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>160]</a></span></p>
-
-<h2><a name="chap11" id="chap11"></a>LECTURE XI.<br />
-<br />
-<span class="lecture">MAKING READY FOR THE PRINTING PRESS.</span></h2>
-</div>
-
-
-<p><span class="dropcap">H</span>AVING made your drawing, had it
-reproduced by one of the methods
-I described, you must now have it printed.</p>
-
-<p>Excepting in the case of very limited fine
-editions of not more than one hundred
-copies, the original plates or blocks on which
-the designs have been engraved are very
-seldom used, because if anything should
-happen to the blocks or plates they would
-have to be done over again. So copies of
-them, called electrotypes and sometimes
-stereotypes, are made. The electrotype of a
-wood or metal block or plate is produced in
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_161" id="Page_161">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>161]</a></span>
-the same way as an electrotype of any other
-object, by usually taking a wax cast of it,
-putting the cast in an electrotyping bath,
-when a shell of copper is deposited upon it.
-As many of these wax casts may be made as
-are wanted, and as many shells are deposited
-as desired. These copper shells are then
-backed up with wood or metal and are ready
-to print from. They are wonderfully cheaply
-and quickly turned out, and in the case of
-magazines and books, for which a large
-circulation is expected, are always used; and
-it is almost, with good work, impossible to tell
-the difference between the electrotype, and
-the original; from a process block or wood
-engraving, while the original block is preserved
-for making additional electrotypes for
-future editions. In the case of cheap books,
-or newspapers with illustrations, the <i>Daily
-Graphic</i>, for example&mdash;the <i>Chronicle</i> was
-printed almost altogether from the original
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_162" id="Page_162">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>162]</a></span>
-blocks, or electrotypes&mdash;the page of type is
-set up with the original blocks in it, and this
-is stereotyped to print from; that is, a papier
-mach&eacute; mould is made of the entire page of
-type and illustrations, either by pounding
-down on to it, with a heavy brush, a thick
-sheet of papier mach&eacute; till the entire page is
-moulded into the pulpy papier mach&eacute;, or by
-covering it with successive sheets of thin
-damp paper until a solid mould or matrix of
-paper is made on the type; this matrix is
-hardened and placed in a curved steel case,
-and type metal poured into the case upon the
-paper mould; as soon as the type metal has
-cooled it is taken out, and a perfect cast of
-the page is seen in metal, curved so that it
-will fit on the cylinder of the printing press.
-If there are no illustrations, it may be printed
-right off, without further preparation; but if
-the page contains illustrations, in order to get
-the proper amount of colour on the blacks,
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_163" id="Page_163">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>163]</a></span>
-and the delicacy of the greys, little pieces of
-paper must be put over and under the illustrations,
-on the printing press, to bring out
-their colour, by increasing or lessening the
-pressure. This is the way in which it is
-done: a man, called the overlay cutter, has
-several proofs of the illustration given him,
-and he cuts them out so as to produce a
-series of skeleton designs, one containing
-only the blacks, another the blacks and dark
-greys, the third the blacks, dark and light
-greys, and so on; these he pastes on the top
-of each other, forming the picture in relief,
-and this relief picture is either placed under
-the block to be printed from, or else on the
-opposite cylinder under the paper on which
-the picture is to be printed&mdash;it must be put
-on very accurately and firmly, for if it slips
-it will ruin the whole page. All this work
-connected with printing is most interesting,
-most complicated, and most wonderfully
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_164" id="Page_164">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>164]</a></span>
-performed. In order to understand it thoroughly,
-you must go and work in a printing office;
-all illustrators should learn at least how overlays
-are made, how to correct them, and how
-to work on blocks or electros, though this is
-really the duty of the engraver; when they
-are on the printing press, little things may
-happen which may make or mar a whole
-book, which only the artist can detect, and
-which he should be able to set right. Therefore
-if you are making a beautiful book, you
-should not only see all the engraver&rsquo;s proofs
-of your drawings, but the printer&rsquo;s proofs as
-well; all this requires much work and more
-knowledge, but unless you care enough about
-your work to acquire this knowledge, I doubt
-if you will ever be a great success as an illustrator&mdash;that
-is, artistically.</p>
-
-<p>Very much has been said lately about the
-artist considering the limitations of the printing
-press, the paper, and ink. Really to-day
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_165" id="Page_165">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>165]</a></span>
-with the best engravers, the best printers
-and paper-makers, there are no limits to the
-possibilities of reproducing and printing
-drawings. The limits are the depth of the
-publisher&rsquo;s pocket. Almost any drawing
-whatever can be reproduced very well, by
-some means, provided the editor or publisher
-will pay the price charged for having it reproduced,
-and the engravers and printers have
-the knowledge of their craft to reproduce it.
-And if the book or magazine will stand the
-expense, it very likely will pay the publisher.
-But if you are working for a magazine, it is
-not likely that the proprietors can afford
-photogravures, therefore your work must be
-made so that it will reproduce well by wood
-engraving or process. And the necessity for
-attention to the mechanical requirements of
-drawing, engraving, and printing increase, as
-the price of the book or paper decreases,
-until when one comes down, financially, to
-<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_166" id="Page_166">[<span class="hidden">Pg </span>166]</a></span>
-the halfpenny papers, only those drawings
-can be used which will print at the utmost
-speed, and with the least care bestowed upon
-them, in poor ink and cheap paper. Still,
-there is no reason why the artistic quality
-also should degenerate; there are men at
-work to-day whose drawings would look just
-as well in the halfpenny evening papers as in
-a three-guinea book, and these men are to be
-congratulated on their perfect mastery of the
-cheaper methods of reproduction. Therefore
-try to do good work in your own way, and
-do not bother about anything but whether
-it will look well on the printed page.</p>
-
-
-<p class="printcredit">UNWIN BROTHERS, PRINTERS, LONDON AND CHILWORTH.</p>
-
-
-
-
-<div class="bbox">
-<p><b>Transcriber&rsquo;s Note</b></p>
-
-<p>Archaic and variant spelling is preserved as printed.</p>
-
-<p>Minor punctuation errors have been repaired.</p>
-
-<p>Hyphenation has been made consistent.</p>
-</div>
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-<pre>
-
-
-
-
-
-End of Project Gutenberg's The Illustration of Books, by Joseph Pennell
-
-*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE ILLUSTRATION OF BOOKS ***
-
-***** This file should be named 51778-h.htm or 51778-h.zip *****
-This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
- http://www.gutenberg.org/5/1/7/7/51778/
-
-Produced by Chris Curnow, Sam W. and the Online Distributed
-Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This file was
-produced from images generously made available by The
-Internet Archive)
-
-Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will
-be renamed.
-
-Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright
-law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works,
-so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United
-States without permission and without paying copyright
-royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part
-of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project
-Gutenberg-tm electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm
-concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark,
-and may not be used if you charge for the eBooks, unless you receive
-specific permission. If you do not charge anything for copies of this
-eBook, complying with the rules is very easy. You may use this eBook
-for nearly any purpose such as creation of derivative works, reports,
-performances and research. They may be modified and printed and given
-away--you may do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks
-not protected by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the
-trademark license, especially commercial redistribution.
-
-START: FULL LICENSE
-
-THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
-PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
-
-To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
-distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
-(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
-Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full
-Project Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at
-www.gutenberg.org/license.
-
-Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project
-Gutenberg-tm electronic works
-
-1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
-electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
-and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
-(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all
-the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or
-destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your
-possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a
-Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound
-by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the
-person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph
-1.E.8.
-
-1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be
-used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
-agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few
-things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
-even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See
-paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project
-Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this
-agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm
-electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below.
-
-1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the
-Foundation" or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection
-of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual
-works in the collection are in the public domain in the United
-States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the
-United States and you are located in the United States, we do not
-claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing,
-displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as
-all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope
-that you will support the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting
-free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm
-works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the
-Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with the work. You can easily
-comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the
-same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg-tm License when
-you share it without charge with others.
-
-1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
-what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are
-in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States,
-check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this
-agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing,
-distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any
-other Project Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no
-representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any
-country outside the United States.
-
-1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
-
-1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other
-immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear
-prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work
-on which the phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the
-phrase "Project Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed,
-performed, viewed, copied or distributed:
-
- This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and
- most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no
- restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it
- under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this
- eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the
- United States, you'll have to check the laws of the country where you
- are located before using this ebook.
-
-1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is
-derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not
-contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the
-copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in
-the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are
-redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase "Project
-Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply
-either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or
-obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg-tm
-trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
-
-1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
-with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
-must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any
-additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms
-will be linked to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works
-posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the
-beginning of this work.
-
-1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
-License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
-work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
-
-1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
-electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
-prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
-active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
-Gutenberg-tm License.
-
-1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
-compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including
-any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access
-to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format
-other than "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official
-version posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site
-(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense
-to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means
-of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original "Plain
-Vanilla ASCII" or other form. Any alternate format must include the
-full Project Gutenberg-tm License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
-
-1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
-performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
-unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
-
-1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
-access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
-provided that
-
-* You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
- the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
- you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed
- to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he has
- agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project
- Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid
- within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are
- legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty
- payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project
- Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in
- Section 4, "Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg
- Literary Archive Foundation."
-
-* You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
- you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
- does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
- License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all
- copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue
- all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg-tm
- works.
-
-* You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of
- any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
- electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of
- receipt of the work.
-
-* You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
- distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
-
-1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project
-Gutenberg-tm electronic work or group of works on different terms than
-are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing
-from both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and The
-Project Gutenberg Trademark LLC, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm
-trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
-
-1.F.
-
-1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
-effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
-works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project
-Gutenberg-tm collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm
-electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may
-contain "Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate
-or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other
-intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or
-other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or
-cannot be read by your equipment.
-
-1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
-of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
-Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
-Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
-Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
-liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
-fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
-LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
-PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
-TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
-LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
-INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
-DAMAGE.
-
-1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
-defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
-receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
-written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you
-received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium
-with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you
-with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in
-lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person
-or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second
-opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If
-the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing
-without further opportunities to fix the problem.
-
-1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
-in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO
-OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
-LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
-
-1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
-warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of
-damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement
-violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the
-agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or
-limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or
-unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the
-remaining provisions.
-
-1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
-trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
-providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in
-accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the
-production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm
-electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses,
-including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of
-the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this
-or any Project Gutenberg-tm work, (b) alteration, modification, or
-additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any
-Defect you cause.
-
-Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
-
-Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
-electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of
-computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It
-exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations
-from people in all walks of life.
-
-Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
-assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
-goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
-remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project
-Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
-and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future
-generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary
-Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see
-Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at
-www.gutenberg.org
-
-
-
-Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
-
-The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
-501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
-state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
-Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
-number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary
-Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by
-U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
-
-The Foundation's principal office is in Fairbanks, Alaska, with the
-mailing address: PO Box 750175, Fairbanks, AK 99775, but its
-volunteers and employees are scattered throughout numerous
-locations. Its business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, Salt
-Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up to
-date contact information can be found at the Foundation's web site and
-official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact
-
-For additional contact information:
-
- Dr. Gregory B. Newby
- Chief Executive and Director
- gbnewby@pglaf.org
-
-Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
-Literary Archive Foundation
-
-Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
-spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
-increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
-freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
-array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations
-($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
-status with the IRS.
-
-The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
-charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
-States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
-considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
-with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations
-where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND
-DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular
-state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate
-
-While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
-have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
-against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
-approach us with offers to donate.
-
-International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
-any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
-outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
-
-Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
-methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other
-ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To
-donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate
-
-Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works.
-
-Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project
-Gutenberg-tm concept of a library of electronic works that could be
-freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and
-distributed Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of
-volunteer support.
-
-Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
-editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in
-the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not
-necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper
-edition.
-
-Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search
-facility: www.gutenberg.org
-
-This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
-including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
-Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
-subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
-
-
-
-</pre>
-
-</body>
-</html>
diff --git a/old/51778-h/images/cover.jpg b/old/51778-h/images/cover.jpg
deleted file mode 100644
index d4f0213..0000000
--- a/old/51778-h/images/cover.jpg
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/old/51778-h/images/logo.png b/old/51778-h/images/logo.png
deleted file mode 100644
index e045e0e..0000000
--- a/old/51778-h/images/logo.png
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ